JP2016120244A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of performing a new operation that can attract player's interest.SOLUTION: The game machine includes performance control means for executing any of a plurality of game performances (a demonstration performance, a round performance, or the like) in accordance with a game state, operation means that is operable by the player, operation determination means for determining whether a prescribed operation to the operation means exists or not, and performance state change means for changing a performance state (e.g., display content, setting of sound volume) of the current game performance being executed by the performance control means. In the case that the operation determination means determines that the prescribed operation exists, then, the performance state change means changes operation states in accordance with the fact that the current game performance being executed by the performance control means is any of the plurality of game performances.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 66

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine played by a player.

  Some modern gaming machines, such as pachinko gaming machines, have various effects to entertain a player. For example, there are many that suggest the reliability (expectation) of the big hit by the display color of the title when performing the reach effect, and the reliability of the big hit by performing a so-called chance-up effect during the reach production. (For example, refer nonpatent literature 1).

“Pachinko Winning Guide”, Guide Works Co., Ltd., February 16, 2014 issue, February 16, 2014 issue, pages 4-11, CR Pachinko Hokuto no Ken 5th edition

  As described above, at present, gaming machines are required not only to provide fun to acquire gaming media (gaming machines, medals, etc.) but also to provide various values (for example, highly interesting effects). Yes. For this reason, game machines are always required to have new actions that can attract the player's interest.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and its main purpose is to provide a gaming machine capable of performing a new operation that attracts the interest of the player.

  In order to achieve the above object, one aspect of the present invention employs the following configuration. In addition, reference numerals in parentheses, explanations, and the like indicate correspondence relationships with embodiments described later in order to help understanding of the present invention, and do not limit the scope of one aspect of the present invention. Absent.

  The gaming machine (1) according to the present invention has an effect control that executes any one of a plurality of game effects (a demonstration effect, a round effect shown in FIG. 66, an effect in the probability variation game state shown in FIG. 76, etc.) according to the game state. Means (400, 500), operation means (37, 38) operable by the player, operation determination means (400, 500) for determining whether or not a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and effect control means Production state changing means (400, 500) for changing the presentation state of the current game presentation being executed (for example, the display state of what kind of presentation is being performed, the setting of the volume). When the operation determining unit determines that the predetermined operation has been performed, the effect state changing unit determines whether the current game effect being executed by the effect control unit is a plurality of game effects. Change state.

  Further, the specific image is an image including a plurality of selectable items (for example, the name of the play production shown in (2) of FIG. 66), and the specific image display means determines that a predetermined operation has been performed by the operation determination means. If the specific image is not displayed, the specific image appearing means (400, 500) for displaying the specific image and the operation determining means determine that the predetermined operation has been performed, the specific image is displayed. It is also possible to have item selection means (400, 500) for selecting any of a plurality of items in the specific image.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the game machine which can perform the novel operation | movement which attracts a player's interest can be provided.

Schematic front view showing an example of a pachinko gaming machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention The enlarged view which shows an example of the indicator 4 provided in the pachinko machine 1 of FIG. Partial plan view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of FIG. The block diagram which shows an example of a structure of the control apparatus provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 The figure for demonstrating an example of the game ball passage determination process peculiar to this embodiment The figure for demonstrating an example of the jackpot breakdown of the special symbol lottery which concerns on this embodiment The figure for demonstrating an example of the jackpot game which concerns on this embodiment The figure for demonstrating an example of the jackpot game which concerns on this embodiment Schematic diagram showing an example of a gaming system in which a plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1 according to the present embodiment are installed An example of a flowchart showing main processing executed by the main control unit 100 An example of a detailed flowchart of the power-off monitoring process in step S911 in FIG. An example of a detailed flowchart of the recovery process in step S909 of FIG. An example of a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the main control unit 100 The figure for demonstrating the data used when performing a special figure game count process and a usual figure game count process, and the storage area (working area) of RAM103 of the main control part 100 An example of a conceptual diagram of a variation time table used for setting the special symbol variation display time in the area 11A An example of a detailed flowchart of the start port switch process in step S2 of FIG. An example of a detailed flowchart of the special symbol process in step S4 of FIG. An example of a detailed flowchart of the variation pattern selection process in step S408 in FIG. The figure for demonstrating an example of a fluctuation pattern determination table The figure for demonstrating an example of a fluctuation pattern determination table The figure for demonstrating an example of a fluctuation pattern determination table The figure for demonstrating an example of a fluctuation pattern determination table The figure for demonstrating an example of a fluctuation pattern determination table The figure for demonstrating an example of a fluctuation pattern determination table An example of a detailed flowchart of the stop process in step S414 in FIG. An example of a detailed flowchart of the big prize opening process in step S6 of FIG. An example of a detailed flowchart of the big prize opening process in step S6 of FIG. An example of a detailed flowchart of the V region opening / closing process in step S612 of FIG. An example of a detailed flowchart of the gaming state setting process in step S625 of FIG. An example of a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing performed by the effect control unit 400 An example of a detailed flowchart showing the RTC effect control process in step S10 of FIG. The figure for demonstrating an example of the phase update which concerns on this embodiment The figure for demonstrating an example of the game state which can perform the RTC effect which concerns on this embodiment An example of a detailed flowchart of command reception processing in step S11 of FIG. An example of a detailed flowchart of command reception processing in step S11 of FIG. An example of a detailed flowchart of the notification effect setting process in step S115 of FIG. An example of a detailed flowchart of the effect state setting process in step S801 in FIG. An example of a detailed flowchart of the effect content determination process in step S803 of FIG. An example of the sub lottery table referred to in step S8034 of FIG. An example of a flowchart showing an RTC effect execution process executed by the image sound control unit 500 An example of a detailed flowchart of the first RTC effect / replacement effect execution process in step S1050 of FIG. An example of a detailed flowchart of the second RTC effect execution process in step S1080 of FIG. An example of a flowchart showing an opening effect process executed by the image sound control unit 500 An example of a flowchart showing a winning process executed by the image sound control unit 500 An example of a flowchart showing an ending effect process executed by the image sound control unit 500 An example of a flowchart showing a round effect process executed by the image sound control unit 500 An example of a detailed flowchart of the effect selection process in step S1245 of FIG. An example of a flowchart showing a customer waiting process executed by the image sound control unit 500 48 is an example of a detailed flowchart of the customer waiting switching process in step S719 in FIG. An example of a flowchart showing an effect execution process executed by the image sound control unit 500 An example of a detailed flowchart of the unlinked effect execution process in step S904 in FIG. An example of a detailed flowchart of the variation effect execution process in step S906 of FIG. An example of a detailed flowchart of the selected theater reach production execution process in step S9062 of FIG. An example of a detailed flowchart of the partial theater reach production execution process in step S9064 of FIG. An example of a detailed flowchart of the development determination effect execution process in step S9066 of FIG. An example of a detailed flowchart of the pseudo-continuous effect execution process in step S9068 of FIG. An example of a detailed flowchart of the after-collision variation effect execution process in step S9070 of FIG. An example of a detailed flowchart of the variation effect execution process during probability change in step S9072 of FIG. An example of a detailed flowchart of the RTC corresponding variation effect execution process in step S9074 of FIG. The figure for demonstrating an example of the switching of the selection effect which concerns on this embodiment. The figure for demonstrating an example of the 1st RTC effect / replacement effect which concerns on this embodiment. The figure for demonstrating an example of the 1st RTC effect / replacement effect which concerns on this embodiment. The figure for demonstrating an example of the 2nd RTC production which concerns on this embodiment The figure for demonstrating an example of the 2nd RTC production which concerns on this embodiment The figure for demonstrating an example of the round production which concerns on this embodiment The figure for demonstrating an example of the round production which concerns on this embodiment The figure for demonstrating an example of the selection drama reach production and partial drama reach production concerning this embodiment The figure for demonstrating an example of the selection drama reach production and partial drama reach production concerning this embodiment The figure for demonstrating an example of the development determination effect which concerns on this embodiment. The figure for demonstrating an example of the development determination effect which concerns on this embodiment. The figure for demonstrating an example of the pseudo | simulation continuous production which concerns on this embodiment The figure for demonstrating an example of the pseudo | simulation continuous production which concerns on this embodiment The figure for demonstrating an example of post-impact exclusive production which concerns on this embodiment The figure for demonstrating an example of post-impact exclusive production which concerns on this embodiment The figure for demonstrating an example of the selection effect in the probability variation game state which concerns on this embodiment. The figure for demonstrating an example of the selection effect in the probability variation game state which concerns on this embodiment.

  Hereinafter, a pachinko gaming machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings as appropriate. Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be simply referred to as a gaming machine 1.

[Schematic configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1]
Hereinafter, a schematic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a schematic front view showing an example of a gaming machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is an enlarged view showing an example of the display 4 provided in the gaming machine 1. FIG. 3 is a partial plan view of the gaming machine 1.

  In FIG. 1, a gaming machine 1 is a pachinko gaming machine configured to pay out a winning ball when a gaming ball launched by a player's operation wins a prize, for example. This gaming machine 1 includes a game board 2 on which game balls are launched, and a frame member 5 surrounding the game board 2. The frame member 5 is configured to be openable and closable with respect to the main part of the gaming machine 1 around a hinge provided on the shaft support side. And the lock part 43 is provided in the predetermined position (for example, edge part on the opposite side to a shaft support side) which becomes the front side of the frame member 5, and the frame member 5 is unlocked by unlocking the lock part 43. Can be opened.

  A game area 20 for playing a game with a game ball is formed on the front surface of the game board 2. In the gaming area 20, a rail member (from which a game ball launched from below (the launching device 211; see FIG. 4) rises along the main surface of the game board 2 and forms a path toward the upper position of the gaming area 20 ( (Not shown) and a guide member (not shown) for guiding the raised game ball to the right side of the game area 20.

  In addition, the game board 2 is provided with an image display unit 6 that displays images for various effects at positions that are easily visible to the player. The image display unit 6 notifies the player of the result of the special symbol lottery (big hit lottery), for example, by displaying a decorative symbol according to the progress of the game by the player, the appearance of a character, the appearance of an item, etc. Or a reserved image showing the number of times the special symbol lottery is held. The image display unit 6 is configured by a liquid crystal display device, an EL (Electro Luminescence) display device, or the like, but any other display device may be used. Furthermore, a movable accessory 7 and a board lamp 8 used for various effects are provided on the front surface of the game board 2. The movable accessory 7 is configured to be movable with respect to the game board 2, and produces an effect by performing a predetermined operation in accordance with the progress of the game or in accordance with the player's operation. The board lamp 8 emits light according to the progress of the game, thereby performing various effects by light.

  In the game area 20, a game nail and a windmill (both not shown) that change the falling direction of the game ball are arranged. Further, in the game area 20, various bonuses related to winning and lottery are arranged at predetermined positions. In FIG. 1, as an example of various prizes related to winning and lottery, the first starting port 21, the second starting port 22, the gate 25, the first major winning port 23, the second major winning port 51, the V region 53 and the regular winning opening 24 are arranged on the game board 2. In addition, the game area 20 is provided with a discharge port 26 through which game balls that have not been won in any of the game areas of the game balls launched into the game area 20 are discharged out of the game area 20. .

  The first start port 21 and the second start port 22 are awarded when a game ball enters, respectively, and a special symbol lottery (big hit lottery) is started. The first start port 21 is provided with a predetermined special electric accessory (first big prize opening 23, second big prize opening 51) and / or a predetermined special symbol display (first special symbol display described later). 4a) is a winning opening relating to a winning game ball. Further, the second start opening 22 operates the special electric accessory and / or a predetermined special symbol display device (second special symbol display device 4b described later), and wins related to winning a game ball. The mouth. When the game ball passes through the gate 25, the normal symbol lottery (the open / close lottery of the electric tulip 27 described below) starts. The lottery is not started even if a game ball wins the normal winning opening 24.

  The second start port 22 is provided on the right side of the first start port 21 and includes an electric tulip 27 in the vicinity of the entrance of the game ball as an example of an ordinary electric accessory. The electric tulip 27 has a pair of wings imitating tulip flowers, and the pair of wings opens and closes left and right by driving an electric tulip opening / closing unit 112 (for example, an electric solenoid) described later. When the pair of blade portions are closed (see FIG. 1), the electric tulip 27 is closed so that the game ball does not enter the second starting port 22 because the opening width guided to the inlet of the second starting port 22 is extremely narrow. It becomes a state. On the other hand, in the electric tulip 27, when the pair of blades are opened to the left and right (not shown), the opening width guided to the entrance of the second start port 22 increases, so that the game ball enters the second start port 22. Easy opening. When the electric tulip 27 passes through the gate 25 and the normal symbol lottery is won, the pair of blades opens for a specified time (for example, 0.10 seconds) and opens and closes for a specified number of times (for example, once). To do.

  The first big winning opening 23 is located below the second starting opening 22 and is opened according to the result of the special symbol lottery. The first grand prize opening 23 is normally in a closed state so that no game ball can enter, but depending on the result of the special symbol lottery, the first winning hole 23 is inclined to project from the main surface of the game board 2 and is in the open state. It becomes a state where the game ball can easily enter. For example, the first big winning opening 23 repeats a round that is in an open state until a predetermined condition (for example, 29.5 seconds elapses or 10 winning game balls) is satisfied a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 times).

  The second big winning opening 51 is located above the second starting opening 22 in the right area of the game area 20 and is opened according to the result of the special symbol lottery. The second grand prize winning opening 51 is normally in a closed state as shown by a solid line in a honey-shaped opening and closing member (hereinafter referred to as a right honey) 50, and no game balls can enter. Depending on the result, the right honey 50 is opened as shown by the dotted line, and the game ball is easy to enter. For example, the second big winning opening 51 is opened until a predetermined condition (for example, 29.5 seconds have passed or 10 game balls have been won, or 0.1 seconds have passed or 10 game balls have been won). A round that becomes a state is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, once).

  As shown in FIG. 1, there is a space inside the second big prize opening 51 where game balls that have entered the second big prize opening 51 flow down. In this space, there are a flow path on the left side and a flow path on the right side. Is provided. This right flow path is provided with a V region 53 (a region in which “V” in FIG. 1 is described) 53, and a V region opening / closing member (hereinafter referred to as “V”) is provided at a branch portion between the left flow channel and the right flow channel. 52) is provided. The V honey 52 is normally in a closed state in which the right flow path is closed as shown by a solid line, and the game ball flows in only the left flow path. Then, the V honey 52 is an opening that opens the right flow path and closes the left flow path as indicated by a dotted line after a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, 3 seconds) after the second big prize opening 51 is opened. Then, after a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, after 6 seconds), the closed state described above is restored. That is, when the V honey 52 is in the closed state, the game ball that has entered the second grand prize winning opening 51 flows down the flow path on the left side and does not pass through the V region 53, and when the V honey 52 is in the open state, the second The game ball that has entered the big prize opening 51 flows down the right flow path and passes through the V region 53. Then, the game balls that have entered the second grand prize winning hole 51 are discharged to the outside of the game area 20 by entering the area 54 after passing through the flow path on the left side or the flow path on the right side. Note that a second big prize winning switch 117 (see FIG. 4) is arranged at the entrance of the second big prize winning opening 51 (that is, the entrance opened and closed by the right honey 50: see FIG. 1), and the second big prize winning is received. When a game ball enters the mouth 51, it is detected that the second big prize opening 51 has been won.

  Further, on the lower right side of the game board 2, a display 4 for displaying the results of the special symbol lottery and the normal symbol lottery described above and the number of reserved items is arranged. Details of the display 4 will be described later.

  Here, the payout of prize balls will be described. When a game ball enters (wins) in the first start port 21, the second start port 22, the first grand prize port 23, the second big prize port 51, and the normal prize port 24, it depends on the place where the game ball has won. Thus, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out per game ball. For example, when one game ball is won at the first start port 21 and the second start port 22, three prize balls are awarded, and when one game ball is won at the first big prize port 23 or the second big prize port 51, thirteen are awarded. When one game ball wins the prize ball and the normal winning opening 24, 10 prize balls are paid out respectively. Even if it is detected that the game ball has passed through the gate 25, there is no payout of the prize ball in conjunction with it.

  The frame member 5 on the front surface of the gaming machine 1 is provided with a handle 31, a lever 32, a stop button 33, a take-out button 34, a speaker 35, a frame lamp 36, an effect button 37, an effect key 38, a dish 39, and the like. Yes.

  When the player touches the handle 31 and performs an operation to rotate the lever 32 clockwise, the launching device 211 (100 per minute) with a hitting force according to the operation angle (for example, 100 per minute). 4) electrically fires the game ball. The tray 39 (see FIG. 3) is provided so as to protrude in front of the gaming machine 1 and temporarily stores game balls supplied to the launching device 211. In addition, the above-described prize balls are paid out to the plate 39. The game balls stored in the tray 39 are supplied to the launching device 211 one by one by a supply device (not shown) at a timing linked with the operation by the player's lever 32.

  The stop button 33 is provided on the lower side surface of the handle 31, and even when the player touches the handle 31 and rotates the lever 32 in the clockwise direction, the game ball is released by being pressed by the player. Is temporarily stopped. The take-out button 34 is provided on the front surface in the vicinity of the position where the tray 39 is provided, and when the player presses it, the game balls accumulated in the tray 39 are dropped into a box (not shown).

  The speaker 35 and the frame lamp 36 respectively notify the gaming state and situation of the gaming machine 1 and perform various effects. The speaker 35 performs various effects using music, voice, and sound effects. In addition, the frame lamp 36 performs various effects by light depending on a pattern by lighting / flashing or a difference in emission color.

  Next, the display 4 provided in the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 2, the display 4 includes a first special symbol display 4a, a second special symbol display 4b, a first special symbol hold indicator 4c, a second special symbol hold indicator 4d, a normal symbol indicator 4e, and a normal symbol indicator 4e. A symbol hold display 4f and a game status display 4g are provided.

  The first special symbol display 4a is displayed with the display symbol varying corresponding to the winning of the game ball at the first starting port 21. For example, the first special symbol display 4a is composed of a 7-segment display device, and when a game ball is won at the first starting port 21, the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and then the lottery result is displayed. Further, the second special symbol display 4b is displayed with the display symbols varying corresponding to the winning of the game ball at the second starting port 22. For example, the second special symbol display 4b is similarly composed of a 7-segment display device, and when a game ball wins at the second starting port 22, the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and then stopped and the lottery result is displayed. To do. In the normal symbol display 4e, the display symbol is changed and displayed in response to the game ball passing through the gate 25. For example, the normal symbol display 4e is constituted by an LED display device, and when a game ball passes through the gate 25, the normal symbol is variably displayed and then stopped and displayed.

  The first special symbol hold indicator 4c displays the number of times that the special symbol lottery is held when a game ball wins at the first start port 21. The second special symbol hold indicator 4d displays the number of times that the special symbol lottery is held when the game ball wins at the second start port 22. The normal symbol hold display 4f displays the number of times the normal symbol lottery is held. For example, the first special symbol hold indicator 4c, the second special symbol hold indicator 4d, and the normal symbol hold indicator 4f are each composed of LED display devices arranged in a row, and the number of times of hold is displayed according to the lighting mode. The

  The game state display 4g displays a game state (such as a short time state) when the gaming machine 1 is powered on.

  Next, an input device provided in the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 3, the gaming machine 1 is provided with an effect button 37 and an effect key 38 as an example of an input device.

  The effect button 37 and the effect key 38 are provided for the player to input the effect. The effect button 37 is provided on the side of the upper surface of the tray 39 protruding forward of the gaming machine 1. The production key 38 has a center key and four direction keys arranged in a substantially cross shape, and is provided on the upper side of the plate 39 adjacent to the production button 37. The effect button 37 and the effect key 38 are each pressed by the player to perform a predetermined effect. For example, the player can enjoy a predetermined effect by pressing the effect button 37 at a predetermined timing. Further, the player can select one of a plurality of images displayed on the image display unit 6 by operating the four direction keys of the effect key 38. Further, the player can input the selected image as information by operating the center key of the effect key 38.

  In addition, on the back side of the gaming machine 1, a ball tank for storing game balls for payout and a payout device (payout drive unit 311) for paying out the game balls to the tray 39 are provided, and various substrates are attached. ing. For example, a main board, a sub board, and the like are disposed on the rear surface of the game board 2. Specifically, a main control board on which a main control unit 100 (see FIG. 4) that performs internal lottery and determination of winning is configured is disposed on the main board. The sub-board includes a firing control board 200 (see FIG. 4) configured to control a launching device 211 that launches a game ball to the upper part of the game area 20, and a payout control unit 300 that controls the payout of a prize ball. A payout control board configured with an effect control board configured with an effect control section 400 for overall control of effects, an image control board configured with an image acoustic control section 500 for controlling effects with images and sounds, and various types The lamp control board etc. in which the lamp control part 600 which controls the effect by the lamp (frame lamp 36, panel lamp 8) and the movable accessory 7 are arranged. In addition, on the rear surface of the gaming board 2, the power source of the gaming machine 1 is switched on / off, and 24V (volt) AC power supplied to the gaming machine 1 is converted into DC power of various voltages. A switching power supply is provided for outputting the direct current power to the various substrates described above.

[Configuration of control device of pachinko gaming machine 1]
Next, with reference to FIG. 4, a control device that performs operation control and signal processing in the gaming machine 1 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of the control device provided in the gaming machine 1.

  4, the control device of the gaming machine 1 includes a main control unit 100, a launch control unit 200, a payout control unit 300, an effect control unit 400, an image sound control unit 500, a lamp control unit 600, and the like.

  The main control unit 100 includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 101, a ROM (Read Only Memory) 102, and a RAM (Random Access Memory) 103. The CPU 101 performs arithmetic processing when performing various controls related to the number of payout prize balls, such as internal lottery and determination of winning. The ROM 102 stores programs executed by the CPU 101 and various data. The RAM 103 is used as a working memory for the CPU 101. Hereinafter, main functions of the main control unit 100 will be described.

  The main control unit 100 performs a special symbol lottery (big hit lottery) when a game ball wins at the first starting port 21 or the second starting port 22, and effects control is performed on determination result data indicating whether or not the special symbol lottery is won. Send to part 400.

  The main control unit 100 controls the opening time when the blade portion of the electric tulip 27 is opened, the number of times the blade portion is opened and closed, and the opening / closing time interval at which the blade portion is opened and closed. Further, the main control unit 100 executes the special symbol lottery execution suspension number when the game ball wins the first start port 21, the special symbol lottery execution suspension number when the game ball wins the second start port 22, In addition, the number of execution suspensions of the normal symbol lottery when the game ball passes through the gate 25 is managed, and data related to the number of suspensions is sent to the effect control unit 400.

  The main control unit 100 controls the opening / closing operation of the first big prize opening 23 and the second big prize opening 51 according to the result of the special symbol lottery. For example, the main control unit 100 performs a predetermined number of rounds in which the first big winning opening 23 protrudes and is in an open state until a predetermined condition (for example, 29.5 seconds elapse or 10 game balls are won) is satisfied ( For example, control is performed to repeat only 16 times. Further, for example, until the main control unit 100 satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, 29.5 seconds have passed or 10 game balls have been won, or 0.1 seconds have passed or 10 game balls have been won). Control is performed so that the round in which the second big winning opening 51 is opened is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, once). In addition, the main control unit 100 controls the opening / closing time interval (interval time) at which the first grand prize winning port 23 and the second big prize winning port 51 open and close.

  The main control unit 100 controls the open state and the closed state of the V region 53 by controlling the posture of the V-shaped honeycomb 52 provided inside the second grand prize winning opening 51 (see FIG. 1). In addition, the main control unit 100 detects that a game ball has passed through the V region 53.

  The main control unit 100 changes the game state in accordance with the progress of the game, and according to the progress of the game, the winning probability of the special symbol lottery, the execution interval of the special symbol lottery (the special symbol is variably displayed on the display 4) In other words, it may be said that it is a time to stop display), and the opening / closing operation of the electric tulip 27 is changed.

  When the game ball wins in the first start port 21, the second start port 22, the first grand prize port 23, the second big prize port 51, and the normal prize port 24, the main control unit 100 takes the place where the game ball has won. Accordingly, the payout control unit 300 is instructed to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls per game ball. Even if the main control unit 100 detects that the game ball has passed through the gate 25, the main control unit 100 does not instruct the payout control unit 300 to pay out the prize ball in conjunction therewith. When the payout control unit 300 pays out a prize ball according to an instruction from the main control unit 100, information on the number of prize balls paid out from the payout control unit 300 is sent to the main control unit 100. Then, the main control unit 100 manages the number of paid-out prize balls based on the information acquired from the payout control unit 300.

  In order to realize the above-described function, the main control unit 100 includes a first start port switch 111a, a second start port switch 111b, an electric tulip opening / closing unit 112, a gate switch 113, a first big prize port switch 114, a first Grand prize opening / closing part 115, second big prize opening switch 117, second big prize opening / closing part 118, V area switch 119, V area opening / closing part 120, normal prize opening switch 116, indicator 4 (first special symbol display) 4a, second special symbol display 4b, first special symbol hold indicator 4c, second special symbol hold indicator 4d, normal symbol indicator 4e, normal symbol hold indicator 4f, and gaming status indicator 4g) It is connected.

  The first start port switch 111 a sends a signal to the main control unit 100 in response to the winning of the game ball to the first start port 21. The second start port switch 111 b sends a signal corresponding to the winning of the game ball to the second start port 22 to the main control unit 100. The electric tulip opening / closing unit 112 opens and closes the pair of blade portions of the electric tulip 27 in accordance with a control signal sent from the main control unit 100. The gate switch 113 sends a signal corresponding to the game ball passing through the gate 25 to the main control unit 100. The first grand prize opening switch 114 sends a signal to the main control unit 100 in response to the winning of the game ball to the first big prize opening 23. The first big prize opening / closing unit 115 opens and closes the first big prize opening 23 in accordance with a control signal sent from the main control unit 100. The second grand prize opening switch 117 sends a signal to the main control unit 100 in response to the game ball having won the second big prize opening 51. The second big prize opening / closing part 118 opens and closes the second big prize opening 51 by changing the posture of the right honey 50 according to the control signal sent from the main control part 100. The V region switch 119 sends a signal to the main control unit 100 in response to the game ball passing through the V region 53. The V region opening / closing unit 120 changes the posture of the V honey 52 according to a control signal sent from the main control unit 100 to open and close the flow path to the V region 53. The normal winning port switch 116 sends a signal to the main control unit 100 in response to the winning of the game ball to the normal winning port 24.

[Switch processing of this embodiment]
Below, the switch process (game ball passage determination process) of the present embodiment will be specifically described. In this game ball passage determination process, a game ball enters the first start port 21, the second start port 22, the gate 25, the first big winning port 23, the second big winning port 51, the V region 53, and the like. For example, it is executed not only when it is determined that the ball has passed (or passed), but also when the payout control unit 300 determines (counts) the paid-out prize ball (the number of prize balls).

  FIG. 5 shows an example of the output signal of the proximity switch installed as the first start port switch 111a for detecting the game ball winning (passing) to the first start port 21 and the like, and the output signal. It is a figure for demonstrating the example of the binarization signal binarized into the ON level and the OFF level using the passage determination threshold value (5V). As an example, the proximity switch has a circular through hole through which a game ball passes through a rectangular plate, and outputs an output signal of a voltage corresponding to a change in magnetic flux when the game ball passes through the through hole. This is a direct current 2-wire electronic switch for output. As shown by the dotted line in FIG. 5, the voltage level of the output signal of the proximity switch decreases as the game ball approaches the center of the through hole, and becomes the minimum (minimum) when the game ball reaches the center of the through hole. The game ball rises as it passes through the center of the through hole and leaves. Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the output signal of the proximity switch is converted to an OFF level of the binarized signal when the voltage level is larger than the passage determination threshold (5V) by a comparator (not shown), and the voltage level is When it is below the passage determination threshold value (5 V), it is converted into an ON level of the binarized signal. In the example of FIG. 5, the passage determination threshold used for the determination is described as one passage determination threshold (5V). However, for example, when switching from the OFF level to the ON level, the first passage determination threshold (5V) is used. On the other hand, the second passage determination threshold (6V) may be used when switching from the ON level to the OFF level. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the binarized signal from improperly switching between ON / OFF due to the output signal of the proximity switch going up and down across the passage determination threshold due to the influence of noise or the like.

  Then, as part of each processing in the timer interrupt processing executed at intervals of 4 milliseconds (4 ms) by the main control unit 100 described later with reference to FIG. 10, the binarized signal shown in FIG. By determining ON / OFF, the game ball is determined to pass. This will be specifically described below.

  As shown in FIG. 5, it is determined at intervals of 4 milliseconds (ON / OFF determination) whether the binary signal is at the ON level or the OFF level. In FIG. 5, the natural number n is used to represent the order of ON / OFF determination. In FIG. 5, the OFF level is determined by the (n−2) -th to n-th ON / OFF determinations, and then the ON level is determined by the (n + 1) th ON / OFF determination. Here, in the present embodiment, when the ON level is determined, in the ON / OFF determination processing determined to be the ON level, a predetermined minute time (for example, 4 microseconds) shorter than the 4 millisecond interval is used. The second ON / OFF determination is executed at the elapsed timing. In FIG. 5, the ON / OFF determination in the (n + 1) th timer interrupt process is determined to be the ON level both times. Thereafter, it is determined to be the OFF level by the ON / OFF determination from the (n + 2) th time to the (n + 4) th time. Note that the ON level period of the binarized signal (referred to as the ON period) is longer than in the case of FIG. 5 (that is, the game ball passes at a slower speed than in the case of FIG. 5). When the determination is also executed during the ON period, the determination is executed twice in the (n + 2) th ON / OFF determination.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5, when the ON level is determined to be the OFF level by the nth ON / OFF determination and the ON level is determined to be the second ON level by the (n + 1) th ON / OFF determination, It is determined that one game ball has passed. The ON / OFF determination is performed by the main control unit 100 (more precisely, the CPU 101) for the proximity switch installed as the first start port switch 111a, for example, and connected to the payout control unit 300, for example. The payout control unit 300 (more precisely, the CPU 301) executes the proximity switch for detecting the payout number of the game balls that have been played (see FIG. 4).

  Here, the predetermined minute time (for example, 4 microseconds) in the (n + 1) th ON / OFF determination shown in FIG. 5 is set in advance according to the software programming content for executing the calculation process of the game ball passage determination. The That is, the predetermined minute time described above is a variable time that can be set to an arbitrary time depending on the programming content. The gaming machine 1 may generate fine period noise (for example, noise of 3 to 15 microsecond period), and this noise period depends to some extent on the type of gaming machine. For example, a certain type of gaming machine is likely to generate noise with a period of 5 microseconds, and a certain type of gaming machine is likely to generate noise with a period of 9 microseconds. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by adopting a configuration in which the predetermined minute time described above can be set to an arbitrary time depending on the programming content, it is possible to effectively avoid erroneous determination due to noise of a fine cycle. Note that the arithmetic processing for providing the predetermined minute time described above is processing that is not related to the progress of the game and is only for earning time. For example, by repeating a process requiring a time of 1 microsecond four times, 4 microseconds can be provided as the above-mentioned predetermined minute time in software.

  By the way, in recent gaming machines, the processing load has increased due to an increase in the contents of arithmetic processing, so the execution interval of timer interrupt processing, which was 2 milliseconds in the previous gaming machine, has been extended to 4 milliseconds. As described with reference to FIG. 5, the ON / OFF determination using the proximity switch is also extended from the 2 millisecond interval and executed at an interval of 4 millisecond.

  Here, the previous gaming machine is determined to be the OFF level by the nth ON / OFF determination, is determined to be the ON level by the (n + 1) th ON / OFF determination, and is determined to be the ON level by the (n + 2) th ON / OFF determination. As a result, it was determined that one game ball passed (hereinafter referred to as “previous determination method”). That is, the game ball passage is determined by three ON / OFF determinations by three timer interruption processes. The reason for determining the ON level at the (n + 1) th time and the (n + 2) th time as described above is to avoid erroneous determination that the game ball has passed due to the accidental determination of the ON level once due to noise. However, in a recent gaming machine in which the ON / OFF determination interval is extended to an interval of 4 milliseconds, the previous determination method described above cannot determine the passage of a game ball passing at a high speed. For example, as the binarized signal ON level period (ON period) shown in FIG. 5 becomes very short (for example, around 7 milliseconds), it is difficult to determine the passing of the game ball passing at a higher speed. End up. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is determined that one game ball has passed by the determination method described with reference to FIG. From this, according to this embodiment, it is possible to reliably determine the passing of the game ball while preventing erroneous determination due to noise by the ON / OFF determination by two timer interruption processes.

  By the way, the gaming machine 1 includes a power monitoring circuit for detecting that the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off, a disconnection detection circuit for detecting that the wiring of the proximity switch is disconnected, and a proximity switch. An abnormality detection circuit (not shown) such as a short circuit detection circuit for detecting that the wiring is short-circuited (short circuit) is provided. These abnormality detection circuits provide a threshold (abnormality determination level) for determining the occurrence of an abnormality at a voltage level higher than the passage determination threshold (5 V) shown in FIG. Therefore, when the voltage of the output signal of the proximity switch decreases, an abnormality is determined before the voltage of the output signal drops to the passage determination threshold, thereby preventing erroneous determination that the game ball has passed. Thus, since the abnormality determination level is provided at a voltage level higher than the passage determination threshold, it is difficult to take a long ON period by setting the passage determination threshold to a high value (for example, 10 V) (see FIG. 5). ). As a result, in the gaming machine 1, it is not realistic to determine the passage of the game ball using the previous determination method by taking a long ON period of the output signal.

In the switch processing described above, the second ON / OFF determination may not be performed in the timer interrupt processing determined to be ON that is executed after the timer interrupt processing determined to be ON.
Further, in the switch processing described above, it may be configured to detect the passage of the game ball by detecting the place where the binarized signal is switched from ON to OFF. That is, in FIG. 5, it may be determined that one game ball has passed with the determination that the n + 1 time timer interrupt process is turned on twice and the n + 2 time timer interrupt process is turned off.
Further, in the switch processing described above, in one timer interrupt process (ON detection), ON / OFF determination may be performed three times or more. In one timer interrupt process (OFF detection), You may perform ON / OFF determination twice or more.
In addition, in the switch processing described above, a configuration may be adopted in which the game ball passage determination is performed without converting the output signal (analog signal) of the proximity switch into a binary signal (digital signal). In other words, the game ball passage determination may be performed by determining whether or not the output signal (analog signal) of the proximity switch is equal to or less than the passage determination threshold (5 V).
In the switch processing described above, the output signal of the proximity switch is an output signal that is at a low voltage level when the game ball is not detected and becomes a high voltage level when the game ball is detected, and a signal inversion means for inverting the output signal Thus, the output signal may be inverted and converted into a signal as indicated by a dotted line in FIG.
Further, the switch processing described above may be configured such that the proximity switch itself converts the analog signal into a binarized signal and outputs it, and the binarized signal is output from the proximity switch.

  This is the end of the description of the switch processing (game ball passage determination processing) of the present embodiment, and the description returns to FIG.

  In addition, the main control unit 100 displays the result of a special symbol lottery started by winning a game ball at the first starting port 21 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a first special symbol lottery) on the first special symbol display 4a. indicate. The main control unit 100 displays on the second special symbol display 4b the result of the special symbol lottery started by the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 22 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the second special symbol lottery). . The main control unit 100 displays the number of times the first special symbol lottery is on hold on the first special symbol hold display 4c. The main control unit 100 displays the number of holdings for which the second special symbol lottery is held on the second special symbol holding display 4d. The main control unit 100 displays the result of the normal symbol lottery started by passing the game ball to the gate 25 on the normal symbol display 4e. The main control unit 100 displays the number of times of holding the normal symbol lottery on the normal symbol hold display 4f. Further, the main control unit 100 displays the gaming state at that time on the gaming state display 4g when the gaming machine 1 is turned on.

  The launch control unit 200 includes a CPU 201, a ROM 202, and a RAM 203. The CPU 201 performs arithmetic processing when performing various controls related to the launching device 211. The ROM 202 stores programs executed by the CPU 201 and various data. The RAM 203 is used as a working memory for the CPU 201.

  When the lever 32 is in the neutral position, the lever 32 is in a firing stop state without outputting a signal. When the player is rotated clockwise by the player, the lever 32 outputs a signal corresponding to the rotation angle to the firing control unit 200 as a hitting ball firing command signal. The launch control unit 200 controls the launch operation of the launch device 211 based on the hit ball launch command signal. For example, the launch control unit 200 controls the operation of the launch device 211 so that the speed at which the game ball is launched increases as the rotation angle of the lever 32 increases. When the signal indicating that the stop button 33 is pressed is output, the launch control unit 200 stops the operation of the launch device 211 firing the game ball.

  The payout control unit 300 includes a CPU 301, a ROM 302, and a RAM 303. The CPU 301 performs a calculation process when controlling the payout of the payout ball. The ROM 302 stores programs executed by the CPU 301 and various data. A RAM 303 is used as a working memory for the CPU 301.

  The payout control unit 300 controls payout of the payout ball based on the command sent from the main control unit 100. Specifically, the payout control unit 300 acquires from the main control unit 100 a command for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls according to the place where the game ball has won. Then, the payout driving unit 311 is controlled so as to pay out the number of prize balls specified by the command. Here, the payout drive unit 311 is configured by a drive motor or the like that sends out a game ball from a game ball storage unit (ball tank).

  The effect control unit 400 includes a CPU 401, a ROM 402, a RAM 403, and an RTC (real time clock) 404. The effect control unit 400 is connected to the effect key 38 operated by the player, and the effect control unit 400 acquires operation data output from the effect key 38 in accordance with the operation of the effect key 38 by the player. To do. Further, the effect control unit 400 acquires operation data output from the effect button 37 via the lamp control unit 600. The CPU 401 performs a calculation process when controlling the effect. The ROM 402 stores programs executed by the CPU 401 and various data. The RAM 403 is used as a working memory for the CPU 401. The RTC 404 measures the current date and time.

  The production control unit 400 sets production contents based on data indicating the special symbol lottery result and the like sent from the main control unit 100. In addition, when the effect button 37 or the effect key 38 is pressed by the player, the effect control unit 400 may set the effect content according to the operation input or the detection result.

  The image sound control unit 500 includes a CPU 501, a ROM 502, a RAM 503, and a nonvolatile RAM 504. The CPU 501 performs arithmetic processing when controlling the image and sound expressing the content of the effect. The ROM 502 stores programs executed by the CPU 501 and various data. The RAM 503 is used as a working memory for the CPU 501. The non-volatile RAM 504 is a non-volatile memory that retains the stored contents even when the power supply from the gaming machine 1 is interrupted. In this embodiment, the non-volatile RAM 504 is used as a memory that stores an identification number of the gaming machine. In the present embodiment, the image sound control unit 500 includes the nonvolatile RAM 504, but the effect control unit 400 may include the nonvolatile RAM 504. In the above description, the non-volatile RAM 504 is literally a non-volatile memory. However, it does not ask whether or not the non-volatile RAM is substantially non-volatile. Any device may be used as long as it retains the stored contents by having the information.

  The image sound control unit 500 controls the image displayed on the image display unit 6 and the sound output from the speaker 35 based on the command sent from the effect control unit 400. Specifically, in the ROM 502 of the image sound control unit 500, a decorative symbol image for notifying a special symbol lottery result, an image of a character or item for displaying a notice effect or a pre-read notice effect, a special symbol lottery The image data for displaying on the image display unit 6 a reserved image indicating that the image is held, various background images, and the like are stored. The ROM 502 of the image sound control unit 500 stores various types of sound data such as music and sound output from the speaker 35 in synchronization with the image displayed on the image display unit 6 or independently of the displayed image. It is remembered. The CPU 501 of the image sound control unit 500 selects and reads out the data corresponding to the command sent from the effect control unit 400 from the image data and sound data stored in the ROM 502. The CPU 501 performs image processing for background image display, decorative symbol image display, character / item display, and the like using the read image data, and performs various processes corresponding to commands sent from the effect control unit 400. Perform production display. Then, the CPU 501 displays the image indicated by the image processed image data on the image display unit 6. In addition, the CPU 501 performs sound processing using the read sound data, and outputs the sound indicated by the sound processing sound data from the speaker 35.

  The lamp control unit 600 includes a CPU 601, a ROM 602, and a RAM 603. The CPU 601 performs arithmetic processing when controlling the light emission of the panel lamp 8 and the frame lamp 36 and the operation of the movable accessory 7. The ROM 602 stores programs executed by the CPU 601 and various data. The RAM 603 is used as a working memory for the CPU 601.

  The lamp control unit 600 controls the lighting / flashing of the panel lamp 8 and the frame lamp 36 and the emission color based on the command sent from the effect control unit 400. The lamp controller 600 controls the operation of the movable accessory 7 based on the command sent from the effect controller 400. Specifically, the ROM 602 of the lamp control unit 600 stores lighting / flashing pattern data and emission color pattern data (emission pattern data) for the panel lamp 8 and the frame lamp 36 according to the production contents set by the production control unit 400. ) Is stored. The CPU 601 selects and reads out the light emission pattern data stored in the ROM 602 corresponding to the command sent from the effect control unit 400. Then, the CPU 601 controls the light emission of the panel lamp 8 and the frame lamp 36 based on the read light emission pattern data. In addition, the ROM 602 stores operation pattern data of the movable accessory 7 corresponding to the effect contents set by the effect control unit 400. The CPU 601 selects and reads out the operation pattern data stored in the ROM 602 corresponding to the command sent from the effect control unit 400. Then, the CPU 601 controls the operation of the movable accessory 7 based on the read operation pattern data.

  The lamp control unit 600 is connected to an effect button 37 operated by the player, and the lamp control unit 600 acquires operation data output from the effect button 37 in response to the operation of the effect button 37 by the player. Then, the operation data is transmitted to the effect control unit 400.

  The effect control unit 400 controls the image sound control unit 500 based on the operation data of the effect button 37 transmitted from the lamp control unit 600 and the operation data output from the effect key 38. The operation state of the production key 38 is notified. Here, the operation state of the effect button 37 and the effect key 38 is whether or not the operation is being performed and what kind of operation is being performed (for example, a long press of the effect button 37 or the effect key 38 Information including pressing of a direction key). Therefore, for example, when the effect button 37 is operated by the player, the operation state of the effect button 37 detected by the lamp control unit 600 is transmitted to the image sound control unit 500 via the effect control unit 400. For this reason, the image sound control unit 500 can change the content of the effect based on the operation state of the effect button 37 transmitted from the effect control unit 400.

[Outline of gaming state in this embodiment]
Next, the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described. The gaming state of the gaming machine 1 includes at least a high probability state, a low probability state, an electric support state, a non-electric support state, a short-time state, a non-short-time state, and a big hit gaming state. The low probability state is a gaming state in which the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is set to a normal low probability (for example, 1/400), and the high probability state is that the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is lower than the low probability state. The gaming state is set to a high probability (for example, 1/100). In the non-electric support state, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is a normal low probability (for example, 1/10), and even if the normal symbol lottery is won, the electric tulip 27 is short (for example, 0.10 seconds). Is a game state in which the release control is performed only once), and therefore, it is a game state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the second start port 22. In the electric support state, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is higher than the non-electric support state (for example, 10/10), and when the normal symbol lottery is won, the electric tulip 27 is long (for example, 2.00 seconds). 3), the electric tulip 27 is frequently opened for a long period of time, and it is easy for the game balls to enter the second start port 22 frequently (winning). A gaming state. The non-short-time state is a gaming state in which the execution time of the special symbol lottery is a normal predetermined time, and the short-time state is a gaming state in which the execution time of the special symbol lottery is shortened compared to the non-short-time state. The jackpot game state is a game state in which a jackpot game is executed in which a special symbol lottery is won (winning) and the first big winning opening 23 is opened. In the present embodiment, the electric support state and the short-time state are controlled at the same time. However, in this gaming state, the gaming ball is likely to win a prize at the second starting port 22, so that the gaming ball is mostly Many special symbol lotteries can be executed in a short time without decreasing. In the following, a gaming state that is controlled to a low-probability state, a non-electric support state, and a non-short-time state is referred to as a normal gaming state, and a gaming state that is controlled to a high-probability state, an electric support state, and a short-time state is a probabilistic gaming state. The low probability state, the electric support state, and the short time state are referred to as the short time game state. In the present embodiment, there is no latent game state that is a gaming state that is controlled in a highly accurate state, a non-electric support state, and a non-time-saving state.

[Outline of the jackpot game in this embodiment]
Next, an outline of the jackpot game of the special symbol lottery in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining an example of the jackpot breakdown of the special symbol lottery according to the present embodiment. (1) in FIG. 6 shows the jackpot breakdown of the special symbol lottery by winning the game ball to the first starting port 21, and (2) in FIG. 6 shows the special symbol lottery by winning the game ball to the second starting port 22. The breakdown of jackpot is shown. As shown in (1) of FIG. 6, the jackpot breakdown of the special symbol lottery by winning the game ball to the first starting port 21 is that the winning probability of the jackpot A is 50% and the winning probability of the jackpot B is 25%. Yes, the winning probability of jackpot C is 25%. Further, as shown in FIG. 6B, the special symbol lottery breakdown of the special symbol lottery by winning the game ball to the second starting port 22 is that the winning probability of the big hit D is 50% and the winning probability of the big hit A is 25. The winning probability of jackpot B is 25%. Below, with reference to (3) of FIG. 6, FIG. 7, and FIG. 8, the big hit game at the time of winning each big hit AD is demonstrated.

  FIG. 7 and FIG. 8 are diagrams for explaining an example of a big hit game when winning big hits A to D according to the present embodiment. The opening timing and closing timing of the big prize opening 23, the second big prize opening 51, and the V region 53 are shown.

  First, the jackpot game in the case of winning the jackpot A will be described with reference to (1) of FIG. When the big hit game is started, the first round winning opening 23 is changed from the closed state to the open state after a predetermined opening time has elapsed, and the first round game (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “R”) is played. Be started. In the 1R round game, when 10 game balls are won in the first grand prize opening 23 or when the opening time is 29.5 seconds, the first grand prize opening 23 is changed from the open state to the closed state. Round game is ended. Then, after an interval period (for example, 2 seconds) between rounds is provided, the 2nd round game is started after the 1st grand prize opening 23 is opened in the same manner as the 1R round, and the 1st big game is started. The winning opening 23 is closed and the 2R round game is ended. Thereafter, similarly, the 3R to 7R round games are executed by opening and closing the first big prize opening 23 with an interval period (2 seconds) interposed therebetween. Then, after the end of the 7R round game, after an interval period (for example, 5 seconds longer than the previous 2 seconds) is provided, the second big prize opening 51 is changed from the closed state to the open state, and the final R The 8R round game is started. In the 8R round game, when 10 game balls are won in the 2nd big prize opening 51 or when the opening time is 29.5 seconds, the 2nd big prize opening 51 is changed from the open state to the closed state. Round game is ended. Thereafter, when a predetermined ending time elapses, the big hit game ends. Here, the V region 53 is changed from the closed state to the open state 3 seconds after the second grand prize winning opening 51 is opened (after the 8R round game is started), for a predetermined time (for example, 8 seconds). ) Opened. From this, in the 8R round game of the big hit game, it becomes possible for one or more game balls that have entered the second big winning opening 51 to pass through the V region 53. Then, on the condition that the game ball passes through the V region 53, the gaming state after the big hit is controlled to a high probability state. More specifically, after the big hit game is finished, until the next special symbol lottery is won. (To be more precise, until the special symbol lottery is executed 9999 times), the game is controlled to be in a probable game state. If no game ball passes through the V area 53 due to reasons such as no game ball being launched in the 8R round game, the game state after the big hit is controlled to a low probability state. The However, in such a case, it is controlled to the short-time gaming state from the end of the big hit game until the end of 100 rotations (that is, until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times), and then the normal gaming state is controlled. Will be.

  Next, the jackpot game when winning the jackpot B will be described using (2) of FIG. When the big hit game is started, similarly to the big hit game in the case of winning the big hit A, the round game of the first to seventh rounds is started after a predetermined opening time has elapsed. Then, after the end of the 7R round game, an interval period (for example, 2 seconds which is the same as the previous 2 seconds) is provided, and then the second big prize opening 51 is changed from the closed state to the open state, and the final R A certain 8R round game is started. However, the 8R round game in the jackpot game when winning the jackpot B is different from the 8R round game in the jackpot game when winning the jackpot A. Specifically, in the 8R round game in the big hit game when winning the big hit B, the second big winning opening 51 is changed from the open state to the closed state after the opening time of 0.1 seconds has passed. Round game is finished. In other words, in the 8R round game of the jackpot game when the jackpot B is won, the second big prize opening 51 is opened momentarily, and thus the game ball hardly enters the second big prize opening 51. . Thereafter, when a predetermined ending time elapses, the big hit game ends. Here, the V region 53 is closed 3 seconds after the second big winning opening 51 is opened (after the 8R round game is started), in the same way as the big hit game when the big hit A is won. The state is changed to the open state, and is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second). That is, in the big hit game when the big hit B is won, the V region 53 is opened 2.9 seconds after the second big winning opening 51 is closed. In addition, due to the structure of the second grand prize opening 51, even if a game ball enters the second big prize opening 51 within the opening period of 0.1 second, the game ball remains within the second big prize opening 51. It is normally impossible to stay for nine seconds, and therefore, the game ball is not normally allowed to pass through the V region 53. Since the game ball does not pass through the V region 53, the gaming state after the big hit is controlled to a low probability state. More specifically, the game state is changed to the short-time gaming state from the end of the big hit game until the end of 100 revolutions. It will be controlled, and then it will be controlled to the normal gaming state.

  Next, the jackpot game when the jackpot C is won will be described with reference to (1) of FIG. When the big hit game is started, after the elapse of a predetermined opening time, the first grand prize opening 23 is changed from the closed state to the open state, and when the extremely short time (for example, 0.1 second) elapses, the first big prize opening 23 is opened. The closed round is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 7 times (7R)) with an interval period (for example, 2 seconds) interposed therebetween. Then, after the end of the 7R round game, an interval period (for example, 2 seconds which is the same as the previous 2 seconds) is provided, and then the second big prize opening 51 is changed from the closed state to the open state, and the final R A certain 8R round game is started. In the 8R round game, as in the 8R round game in the jackpot game when the jackpot B is won, the second big winning opening 51 is instantaneously opened (the opening time is 0.1 second). Therefore, the game ball rarely enters the second big winning opening 51, and after that, when the predetermined ending time elapses, the big hit game ends. In other words, while the jackpot game in the case of winning the jackpot C is being executed, the first jackpot 23 and the second jackpot 51 are only opened momentarily, so the player can play the jackpot game. You can't get a prize ball in between. In addition, the V area 53 is opened 2.9 seconds after the second big prize opening 51 is closed in the same manner as the big hit game in the case of winning the big hit B, so the V area 53 is played in the game. The ball never passes. For this reason, the gaming state after the big hit is controlled to the low probability state, more specifically, it is controlled to the short-time gaming state from the end of the big hit game to the end of 30 rotations, and then to the normal gaming state. The Rukoto.

  Next, the jackpot game when the jackpot D is won will be described with reference to (2) of FIG. When the big hit game is started, the round game of the first to eighth rounds is started after the elapse of a predetermined opening time, like the big hit game in the case of winning the big hit A. The V region 53 is changed from the closed state to the open state 3 seconds after the 8R round game is started, and is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 8 seconds), so in the 8R round game of the big hit game, One or more game balls that have entered the second grand prize winning opening 51 can pass through the V region 53. When the 8R round game ends, the 9th to 16th round games are executed by opening and closing the first grand prize opening 23 with an interval period (2 seconds) in between, and after that, when a predetermined ending time has passed, The game ends. Then, on the condition that the game ball passes through the V region 53, the gaming state after the big hit is controlled to a high probability state. More specifically, after the big hit game is finished, until the next special symbol lottery is won. (To be more precise, until the special symbol lottery is executed 9999 times), the game is controlled to be in a probable game state. If no game ball passes through the V area 53 due to reasons such as no game ball being launched in the 8R round game, the game state after the big hit is controlled to a low probability state. The However, in such a case, the game is controlled to the short-time game state from the end of the big hit game to the end of 100 rotations, and then to the normal game state.

  In the following, in the big hit game when the big hit B or big hit C is won, the second big winning opening 51 is instantaneously opened (short open), so that the game ball cannot pass through the V region 53. This round game is referred to as V short round game, and the game is performed when the second big prize opening 51 is opened for a longer time (long open) than the short open in the big hit game when winning big hit A or big hit D. The 8R round game in which a ball can pass through the V region 53 is referred to as a V long round game. In the following, passing a game ball through the V region 53 is referred to as V winning, and a round in which the above V long round game is performed may be simply referred to as V round. Further, in the above, the V long round game and the V short round game are executed as the 8R round game in the big hit game, but the game is not limited to this, and is executed as any round game. It may also be executed not only as one round game but as a plurality of round games.

  As described above, as shown in (3) of FIG. 6, in the big hit A, a total of 8 round games including the V long round game are executed as the round games that can win the prize ball, and the V long round game is executed. Since the game ball can pass through the V region 53, after the big hit game, in principle, the game is controlled in the probability variation game state until the next special symbol lottery is won. In jackpot B, a total of 8 round games including V short round games are executed. However, in V short round games, game balls practically do not enter the second big winning opening 51, so it is possible to win prize balls. As a substantial round game, a total of seven round games (7R) excluding the V short round game are executed, and the game ball cannot pass through the V region 53 during the V short round game. After that, it is controlled in the short-time gaming state up to 100 rotations. In the big hit C, since the first round winning opening 23 is opened for a very short time (for example, 0.1 seconds), 7 round games and V short round games are executed, so that a substantial round in which a winning ball can be obtained. There is no game (substantially 0R), and the game ball cannot pass through the V region 53 during the V short round game, so after the big hit game, it is controlled in the short time game state up to 30 rotations. In the big hit D, a total of 16 round games including the V long round game are executed as round games that can win the prize ball, and the game ball can pass through the V area 53 during the V long round game. After the game, in principle, the game is controlled in a probable game state until the next special symbol lottery is won. In the following, the big hit A and the big hit D in which the V long round game is executed (that is, in principle, controlled to the high-probability gaming state after the big hit game) are collectively referred to as a continuous big hit, and the V long round game Is not executed (that is, it is not controlled to a high probability state after the big hit game), and the big hit B that the winning ball can be acquired is called a single hit big hit, the V long round game is not executed, and the winning ball is substantially A jackpot C that cannot be earned is sometimes called a big hit. Further, as can be seen from (1) and (2) of FIG. 6, the game state controlled after the big hit becomes an advantageous state (probability change game state) in the big hit breakdown by the game ball winning to the second starting port 22. The ratio of the consecutive big hits (75%) is higher than the ratio of the consecutive big hits (50%) in the breakdown of the big hits by winning the game balls to the first start port 21. Further, the expected value of the number of rounds for winning the game ball to the second starting port 22 is higher than the expected value of the number of rounds for winning the game ball to the first starting port 21. Thus, in this embodiment, the profit degree when winning the second special symbol lottery is larger than the profit degree when winning the first special symbol lottery.

[Outline of gaming system in this embodiment]
Next, a gaming system in a pachinko hall where a plurality of gaming machines 1 are installed will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of a gaming system in which a plurality of gaming machines 1 are installed. As shown in FIG. 9, in the pachinko hall, one island is configured by arranging a plurality of the above-described gaming machines 1 (for example, 20). Each gaming machine 1 installed on this island is electrically connected to a power source 700 through a common power line. For this reason, the power supply 700 is turned on with the individual power switch of each gaming machine 1 being “ON” (the power supply input signal is transmitted from the power supply 700 to each gaming machine 1). A plurality of installed gaming machines 1 can be activated simultaneously. For this reason, first, by installing a plurality of gaming machines 1 first introduced into the pachinko hall on one island and starting them all at once, power can be supplied to the RTC 404 at the same timing. Therefore, the RTC 404 can start measuring time at the same timing. After the RTC 404 starts measuring time, the pachinko hall is closed and power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off. Since the time measurement is continued by operating with the internal battery, each RTC 404 of the plurality of gaming machines 1 installed on one island can measure the time without deviation from the other RTC 404. it can. As will be described in detail later, the gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment uses all the gaming machines 1 installed on the same island using the time information of the RTC 404 that has started measuring time using such a startup method. The same effect (RTC effect described later) can be started simultaneously at the same timing.

  Next, a processing flow executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

[Main processing by main control unit 100]
First, the main process executed by the main control unit 100 will be described with reference to FIG. This main process is started when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, and is continuously executed while the main control unit 100 is activated.

  In step S901 in FIG. 10, first, the CPU 101 waits, for example, 2000 ms, and the process proceeds to step S902. Although not shown, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the CPU 401 of the effect control unit 400 can receive a signal from the main control unit 100 without performing standby processing. . That is, the CPU 401 of the effect control unit 400 is in a state where processing can be started before the CPU 101 of the main control unit 100.

  In step S902, the CPU 101 can access the RAM 103, and the process proceeds to step S903.

  In step S903, the CPU 101 determines whether or not a RAM clear switch (not shown) is “ON”. If the determination in step S903 is YES, the process proceeds to step S904. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S907.

  In step S904, the CPU 101 clears the RAM. Here, the RAM clear is a well-known technique and will not be described in detail, but various information (for example, information indicating the gaming state) stored in the RAM 103 is set to a predetermined initial state. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S905.

  In step S905, the CPU 101 sets a work area when the RAM is cleared, and the process proceeds to step S906.

  In step S906, the CPU 101 performs initial setting of the peripheral portion. Here, the peripheral portion is the effect control unit 400, the payout control unit 300, or the like. Initial setting of the peripheral unit is performed by transmitting an initial setting command for instructing execution of the initial setting to each control unit. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S910.

  In step S907, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the backup flag is “ON”. Note that the backup flag is a flag that is turned on when the generation of backup data is normally completed when the power is turned off, and is a flag indicating that the backup data is valid in association with the generated backup data. If the determination in step S907 is YES, the process moves to step S908. If the determination is NO, the process moves to step S904.

  In step S908, the CPU 101 determines whether the checksum is normal. If the determination in step S908 is YES, the process proceeds to step S909. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S904.

  In step S909, the CPU 101 executes a recovery process (see FIG. 12) described later, and the process proceeds to step S910.

  In step S910, the CPU 101 sets a cycle (for example, 4 ms) of a built-in CTC (timer counter). Note that the CPU 101 executes a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 13), which will be described later, using the period set here. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S911.

  In step S911, the CPU 101 executes a power-off monitoring process (see FIG. 11) described later, and the process proceeds to step S912.

  In step S912, the CPU 101 performs setting to prohibit interruption of the timer interrupt process, and the process proceeds to step S913.

  In step S913, the CPU 101 updates (counts up) various initial value random numbers, and the process proceeds to step S914. Here, the initial value random number is used to determine the start value of various random numbers (big hit random number, symbol random number, reach random number, variation pattern random number) that are counted up and updated in timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 13) described later. A plurality of initial value random numbers corresponding to various random numbers are prepared. The initial value random number includes a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 13) that occurs every predetermined CTC period (4 ms) and a remaining time (that is, a process time required for the timer interrupt process from the predetermined CTC period). It is counted up and updated both in the main process (see FIG. 10) processed during the subtracted time, and after reaching the set maximum value (for example, 299), it returns to the minimum value (for example, 0) again. Further, since this remaining time varies depending on the processing status of the CPU 101, it is a random time, and the number of updates of the initial random number that is updated with the remaining time is also random. On the other hand, as will be described in detail later, since various other random numbers (big hit random numbers, design random numbers, reach random numbers, fluctuation pattern random numbers) are updated only by timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 13), initial value random numbers are random number update processing. The processing cycle is different. In this way, due to the difference in processing cycle, for example, even if the random number range of the initial value random number and the big hit random number is the same (for example, 0 to 299), the initial value random number acquired as the start value of the big hit random number The value is random every time. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the timing at which the big hit random number value that generates the big hit is acquired.

  In step S914, the CPU 101 performs setting to permit interruption of the timer interrupt process, and the process returns to step S911. That is, the CPU 101 repeatedly executes the processes in steps S911 to S914.

[Power-off monitoring process by the main control unit 100]
FIG. 11 is a detailed flowchart of the power-off monitoring process in step S911 in FIG. In step S9111, the CPU 101 prohibits the interrupt process, and the process proceeds to step S9112.

  In step S9112, the CPU 101 determines whether the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off based on whether a power cut-off signal is input from a power supply unit (not shown). If the determination in step S9112 is YES, the process moves to step S9114. If the determination is NO, the process moves to step S9113.

  In step S9113, the CPU 101 permits the interrupt process and ends the power shutdown monitoring process (the process moves to step S912 in FIG. 10).

  On the other hand, in step S9114, the CPU 101 clears the output port through which various information is input / output to / from the CPU 101, and the process proceeds to step S9115.

  In step S 9115, the CPU 101 creates backup data in the RAM 103 based on the current gaming state of the gaming machine 1, creates a checksum from the contents of the RAM 103, and stores the checksum in the RAM 103. In this process, the power supply voltage is set to “0” after detecting that the power supply voltage has started to decrease due to the power supply cutoff of the power supplied to the main control unit 100 (after “YES” is determined in step S9112). It is done during the period until it becomes. Through this process, game state information and the like immediately before the power is turned off are stored in the RAM 103. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S9116.

  In step S9116, the CPU 101 sets the backup flag to “ON”, and the process proceeds to step S9117.

  In step S 9117, the CPU 101 prohibits access to the RAM 103 and ends the power shutdown monitoring process (the process moves to step S 912 in FIG. 10).

[Restoration process by main control unit 100]
FIG. 12 is a detailed flowchart of the recovery process in step S909 of FIG. First, in step S9091 of FIG. 12, the CPU 101 sets a work area of the RAM 103 at the time of restoration, and the process proceeds to step S9092.

  In step S9092, the CPU 101 refers to the information in the RAM 103, confirms information regarding the gaming state at the time of power-off and the number of special symbol lotteries held, and sends a recovery notification command including the information to the effect control unit 400. Send. As described above, the CPU 101 transmits a recovery notification command indicating the power-off state to the effect control unit 400 in order to notify that the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been recovered. By the processing in step S9092, the effect control unit 400 can check the gaming state before power-off and the like.

  In step S9093, the CPU 101 sets a peripheral part, and the process proceeds to step S9094.

  In step S9094, the CPU 101 sets the backup flag to “OFF” and ends the recovery process (the process moves to step S910 in FIG. 10).

[Timer interrupt processing of main control unit]
Next, a timer interrupt process executed in the main control unit 100 will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing performed by the main control unit 100. Hereinafter, a timer interrupt process performed in the main control unit 100 will be described with reference to FIG. The main control unit 100 repeatedly executes a series of processes shown in FIG. 13 at regular time intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds) during a normal operation except for special cases such as when the power is turned on or when the power is turned off. Note that the processing performed by the main control unit 100 described based on the flowcharts of FIG. 13 and subsequent figures is executed based on a program stored in the ROM 102.

  First, in step S1, the CPU 101 of the main control unit 100 serves as a starting value for updating various random numbers such as jackpot random numbers, symbol random numbers, reach random numbers, and variation pattern random numbers, and counting up each random number. Random number update processing for updating each initial value random number is executed. Here, the big hit random number is a random number for determining whether or not a special symbol lottery is won or lost (that is, performing a special symbol lottery). The symbol random number is a random number for determining the type of jackpot when the special symbol lottery is won. The jackpot random number and the design random number are random numbers used in the process of step S407 in FIG. 17 described later. The reach random number is a random number for determining whether or not a reach effect is performed when a special symbol lottery is lost. The variation pattern random number is a random number for determining the variation time (variation pattern) of the special symbol. Here, the variation time of the special symbol is equal to the execution time of the notification effect (variation effect) executed in synchronization with the variation of the special symbol. The reach random number and the fluctuation pattern random number are used in the process of step S408 in FIG. 17 described later. In the random number update process of step S1, the big hit random number, the design random number, the reach random number, the variation pattern random number, etc. are each added and updated by one. That is, it is counted up. Each random number is acquired in the start port switch (SW) process in step S2 and the gate switch (SW) process in step S3, and is used in the special symbol process in step S4 and the normal symbol process in step S5 described later. Note that the counter that performs the processing of step S1 is typically a loop counter, and returns to 0 again after reaching the maximum value of the set random number (for example, 299 for the variation pattern random number) (that is, the circulation counter). To do). In addition, in the random number update process of step S1, each counter such as a big hit random number, a design random number, a reach random number, and a variation pattern random number is initialized to an initial value corresponding to each random number at that time when the loop counter counts once. A random number is acquired, and the loop counter is newly started using the initial random number as a start value. The random number ranges such as jackpot random numbers, design random numbers, reach random numbers, and fluctuation pattern random numbers may be set arbitrarily. (Value) is preferably set so as not to synchronize.

  Next, in step S2, the CPU 101 monitors the state of the first start port switch 111a and the second start port switch 111b, and when one of the switches is turned on (the first start port switch 111a or the second start port switch 111b). When a game ball detection signal is output from the mouth switch 111b), a start opening switch that performs processing relating to the number of holdings U1 for the first special symbol lottery, the number of holdings U2 for the second special symbol lottery, and processing for obtaining various random numbers. Execute the process. Details of the start port switch process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, in step S3, the CPU 101 monitors the state of the gate switch 113 and, based on the output signal from the gate switch 113, determines that the game ball has passed through the gate 25. Is determined to be less than the upper limit value (for example, 4), and if it is determined that the number of holds is less than the upper limit value, a gate switch process for acquiring a random number used in the normal symbol process in step S5 described later is executed. .

  Next, in step S4, the CPU 101 executes the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, and after the special symbols are variably displayed on the first special symbol display 4a or the second special symbol display 4b, these are displayed. The stop symbol display process showing the lottery result of the above and the special symbol process for transmitting various commands to the effect control unit 400 are executed. This special symbol process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

  Next, in step S5, the CPU 101 executes a normal symbol process for determining whether or not the random number acquired in the gate switch process in step S3 matches a predetermined hit random number. Then, the CPU 101 stops and displays the normal symbol indicating the determination result after the normal symbol is variably displayed on the normal symbol display 4e. Specifically, the CPU 101 sets the normal symbol change time to be stopped and displayed after the normal symbol is variably displayed to 10 seconds in the non-time-short state and to 0.5 seconds in the time-short state. Further, the CPU 101 sets the probability that the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display 4e becomes a predetermined winning symbol (that is, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery) is set to a low probability (1/10) in the non-short-time state. In the short-time state, the probability is increased to a high probability (10/10).

  Next, in step S6, when it is determined that the special symbol lottery is won in the special symbol processing in step S4 (when a big hit is made), the CPU 101 controls the first big prize opening opening / closing unit 115 to control the first symbol winning lot opening / closing unit 115. Various commands related to so-called big hit game effects, etc. are made to cause the special winning opening 23 to perform a predetermined opening / closing operation, to control the second grand prize winning opening / closing unit 118 to perform the predetermined opening / closing operation to the second special winning opening 51. Is performed to transmit to the effect control unit 400. By this processing, the big hit game (special game) is progressed, and the player can acquire a large amount of prize balls. This special winning opening process will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS.

  Next, in step S7, the CPU 101 performs electric driving when the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display 4e by the normal symbol processing in step S5 is a predetermined winning symbol (that is, when the normal symbol lottery is won). An electric tulip process for operating the tulip 27 is executed. At that time, the CPU 101 controls the opening of the electric tulip 27 for a very short period (once for 0.10 seconds) in the non-electric support state, and the electric tulip 27 for a long period (three times for 2.00 seconds) in the electric support state. Open control. In addition, when the electric tulip 27 is controlled to be in the open state, a game ball can be won at the second start port 22, and when the game ball wins at the second start port 22, a second special symbol lottery is performed. Will be.

  Next, in step S <b> 8, the CPU 101 executes prize ball processing for managing the number of winning game balls and controlling the payout of prize balls according to the prize.

  Next, in step S9, the CPU 101 executes various commands and effects set in the RAM 103 by the start opening switch process in step S2, the special symbol process in step S4, the big winning opening process in step S6, the prize ball process in step S8, and the like. Output processing for outputting information necessary for the production control unit 400 or the payout control unit 300 is executed. It should be noted that the CPU 101 plays a game at each winning opening each time a game ball wins the first starting opening 21, the second starting opening 22, the first major winning opening 23, the second large winning opening 51, and the ordinary winning opening 24. A winning command for notifying that the ball has won is set in the RAM 103, and the winning command is output to the effect control unit 400 or the payout control unit 300.

[About control time count processing]
Here, although explanation is omitted in the timer interrupt process described above with reference to FIG. 13, in this timer interrupt process, the CPU 101 measures a series of control times on the special symbol game side using one timer function. Control time count processing on the game side (referred to as “special game count processing”), and control time count processing on the normal symbol game side that measures a series of control times on the normal symbol game side using one timer function (“ The usual game count process ”is executed. The special game count process and the normal game count process are executed in order between the process of step S7 and the process of step S8 in FIG. 13, for example. In addition, the special symbol game waits for the winning of the game ball to the start opening (21 or 22), repeatedly executes the special symbol lottery in response to the winning of the game ball, and notifies the lottery result, When the special symbol lottery is won, the game is a big hit game. The normal symbol game waits for the game ball to pass to the gate 25, repeats the normal symbol lottery according to the passing of the game ball and informs the lottery result, and wins the normal symbol lottery. In this case, the opening / closing control of the electric tulip 27 (electric chew opening game) is executed.

  In the following, first, the special game count process will be described. FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining the data used when executing the special game count process and the normal game count process, and the storage area (work area) of the RAM 103 of the main control unit 100.

  (1) of FIG. 14 shows the type of data (referred to as “special drawing side setting data”) for setting (specifying) the time to be counted on the special symbol game side. The special figure side setting data is data for setting which period of each period (time) of the special symbol game is measured. In each period (time) of this special symbol game, as shown in (1) of FIG. 14, “Waiting for start opening prize”, “Displaying special symbol variation”, “Displaying special symbol stop” , “Opening display”, “Rounding”, “Large winning slot valid period”, and “Ending display” are included.

  “Waiting for start entrance prize” is a state (period) in which a special symbol lottery related to the start entrance prize can be immediately executed to start displaying the variation of the special design when there is a start entrance prize. It is not a big hit game, and it is in a state where neither a special symbol change display nor a specified time stop display is displayed. “During special symbol variation display” is a state (period) in which special symbol lottery is executed according to the start opening winning and the special symbol variation display is performed on the display 4. “During special symbol stop display” is a state (period) in which the special symbol variably displayed on the display unit 4 is completely stopped and displayed for a specified time (0.5 seconds) in a display mode for notifying the special symbol lottery result. It is. “Opening display” is a state (period) in which an opening effect is displayed on the image display unit 6 informing that the special symbol lottery is won and that the big hit game has started. “During round” is a state (period) in which a round (round game) in which the first big prize opening 23 or the second big prize opening 51 is opened in the big hit game. “During the grand prize winning period” is placed immediately after each round, and the first big prize of the game ball is closed despite the end of the round and the closing of the first big prize opening 23 or the second big prize opening 51. This is a period during which a winning at the winning opening 23 or the second major winning opening 51 is recognized as valid, and so-called over winning is recognized. In the period excluding the period during the round and the grand prize winning period, the winning of the game ball to the first big prize opening 23 or the second big prize winning slot 51 is not recognized as valid. “During ending display” is a state (period) in which an ending effect is displayed on the image display unit 6 to notify the end of the big hit game.

  As shown in (1) of FIG. 14, for example, the special figure side setting data “00H” is data for setting “waiting for start opening prize”, for example, the special figure side setting data “01H” This is data for setting that “special symbol variation is being displayed”. These special figure side setting data are stored in the ROM 102.

  FIG. 14 (3) is a schematic diagram of a storage area (working area) of the RAM 103. As shown in (3) of FIG. 14, the storage area of the RAM 103 includes a count target time setting area 10, a time count area 11, and a simple variation display time count area 12. The count target time setting area 10 includes a count target time setting area 10A (referred to as “area 10A”) on the special symbol game side and a count target time setting area 10B (referred to as “area 10B”) on the normal symbol game side. The time count area 11 includes a time count area 11A (referred to as “area 11A”) on the special symbol game side and a time count area 11B (referred to as “area 11B”) on the normal symbol game side. The simple variation display time count area 12 includes a special symbol display time count area 12A (referred to as "Area 12A") on the special symbol game side and a simple variation display time count area 12B ("Area 12B") on the normal symbol game side. Said).

  Area 11A is a timer area for measuring the passage of time for each period of the above-described special symbol game (such as “special symbol variation display”), and measures one passage of time by writing one piece of time data. This is a timer area. The area 10A is an area for setting the type of time measured in the area 11A by writing any one of the special figure side setting data described with reference to (1) of FIG. When the special symbol is variably displayed in the 7-segment display on the first special symbol display 4a (or the second special symbol display 4b), the area 12A displays the three display modes of the 7-segment display every 48 milliseconds. This is a timer area for measuring the time lapse of 48 milliseconds when executing the control for switching and displaying in order, and a timer area for measuring one lapse of time by writing one time data. is there. Note that the three display modes of the 7-segment display are, for example, a display mode that indicates the number 0, a display mode that indicates the number 7, and a display mode in which all seven segments are turned off.

  The CPU 101 sets the type of period (time) to be measured by the area 11A by writing the special setting side setting data in the area 10A, and writes the time data to be measured in the area 11A. In the timer interrupt process of FIG. By subtracting the time data value of the area 11A by 1 by the special figure game count process executed every millisecond, the progress of each period of the special symbol game is sequentially performed using one timer area (area 11A). Measure in order.

  In addition, when the special symbol variation display time is measured in the area 11A, the CPU 101 writes predetermined time data (“12”) in the area 12A and executes it every 4 milliseconds in the timer interrupt processing of FIG. When the value of the time data in the area 12A is subtracted by 1 by the special figure game count process to be 0, the predetermined time data ("12") is written again and the display mode of the special symbol is switched. As a result, when the special symbol is variably displayed in the 7-segment display on the first special symbol display 4a (or the second special symbol display 4b), the three display modes of the 7-segment display are changed every 48 milliseconds. It will be switched in order and displayed cyclically.

  In (3) of FIG. 14, as an example, it is set that “01H” is written in the area 10 </ b> A so that the elapsed time of the special symbol variation display is measured in the area 11 </ b> A. In addition, as an example, a value “2500” indicating time is written in the area 11A of (3) in FIG. 14, but this value is decremented by 1 every 4 milliseconds by the timer interrupt processing in FIG. Since it is updated, this value “2500” indicates 10.000 seconds. In addition, as an example, a value “12” indicating time is written in the area 12A of (3) in FIG. 14, but this value is also subtracted by 1 every 4 milliseconds by the timer interrupt processing in FIG. Therefore, this value “12” indicates 48 milliseconds.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, a series of control times for a special symbol game is measured using one timer function (see 11A in (3) of FIG. 14). Here, in the conventional gaming machine, each control time (control time for special symbol variation display, control time for round execution, etc.) constituting the special symbol game was measured using an individual timer function. A separate time count area was provided for each control time constituting the special symbol game in the RAM storage area of the main control unit. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the series of control times of the special symbol game is measured using one timer function, so that the calculation load can be effectively reduced. In addition, according to the present embodiment, the special symbol display 4a (or 4b) in the execution period of the special symbol variation display is configured to cyclically display three 7-segment display modes in turn every 48 milliseconds. For measuring the switching time, a timer function (see 12A in FIG. 14 (3)) different from the timer function (see 11A in FIG. 14 (3)) is used. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to effectively suppress the complexity of the arithmetic processing.

  FIG. 15 is an example of a conceptual diagram of a variation time table used for setting the special symbol variation display time in the area 11A. This variation time table is stored in the ROM 102 and read out to the RAM 103 for use. As shown in FIG. 15, the variation time table includes a variation pattern identification number, data indicating basic variation time (seconds), and data indicating addition variation time (seconds). The identification number of the variation pattern is used to identify the variation pattern included in the variation pattern determination tables HT1-1, HT1-2, HT2-1, HT2-2, HT3, and HT4, which will be described later with reference to FIGS. Is the number. The basic variation time is a basic variation time constituting a variation pattern (that is, a special symbol variation time). The added fluctuation time is an added fluctuation time constituting a fluctuation pattern. A time obtained by adding the basic fluctuation time and the addition fluctuation time is a fluctuation pattern. For example, the variation pattern corresponding to the identification number 5 is 90.06 seconds obtained by adding the addition variation time 0.06 seconds to the basic variation time 90 seconds. For example, the variation pattern corresponding to the identification number 26 is the basic variation time. 8 seconds. In FIG. 15, only one example of the variation pattern is displayed, and not all variation patterns are displayed.

  When the CPU 101 measures the special symbol fluctuation display time in the area 11A of (3) of FIG. 14, the time data (“seconds”) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined in the process of step S408 of FIG. Is read from the fluctuation time table (see FIG. 15) of the RAM 103, and the read time data is multiplied by 250 to be converted into time data suitable for time measurement processing executed in a cycle of 4 milliseconds. Then, the converted time data is written in the area 11 A of the RAM 103. For example, when the value of the time data indicating the variation pattern “90.06 seconds” corresponding to the identification number 5 is set in the area 11A, the basic variation time 90 seconds and the addition variation time 0.06 from the variation time table of the RAM 103. The time data indicating the second is read and added, and the added time data is multiplied by 250 to be converted into time data “22515” adapted to the arithmetic processing with a period of 4 milliseconds, and the converted time data “22515” is converted into the RAM 103. Is written in the area 11A. In addition, for reference, time data that is multiplied by 250 and adapted to a calculation process with a period of 4 milliseconds is described on the side of the variation time table in FIG. 15. However, when 250 is multiplied, it is not a natural number. Things (see values in parentheses) are adjusted to natural numbers by rounding off.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the time data indicating the variation pattern (special symbol variation time) of the variation time table stored in the ROM 102 and read out to the RAM 103 is changed to the data indicating the time of “second” (that is, the division value). Time data (refer to the basic variation time portion of FIG. 15), and when setting the special symbol variation time, it is multiplied by 250 and adapted to the calculation process of a cycle of 4 milliseconds (that is, the time of the multiplication value) Data; see the right side of the variation time table in FIG. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the data indicating the special symbol variation time in the variation time table may be suppressed to a data amount of 1 byte or less (for example, identification numbers 24 to 26 in FIG. 15). In addition, the used memory area of the RAM 103 can be effectively suppressed. In addition, according to the present embodiment, for example, a special symbol variation time exceeding 90 bytes for a special symbol variation time exceeding 90 bytes, such as a special symbol variation time of 90.04 seconds, the additional variation time A variable time table is configured by dividing the data (time data indicating the time after the decimal point) (see FIG. 15). Here, in FIG. 15, the same time data value is described for each variation pattern in the table of the added variation time portion for convenience of explanation, but actually the same time data value is duplicated in this table. Only one is stored. For example, in the table of the added fluctuation time portion, although three time data values of 0.04 seconds are shown for convenience of explanation in FIG. 15, only one is actually stored. From this, according to the present embodiment, the used memory areas of the ROM 102 and the RAM 103 can be effectively suppressed. Here, in this embodiment, for the sake of simplicity, 32 variation patterns are used (see FIG. 15). However, in an actual gaming machine, the variation pattern is enormous, 1000 to 10,000. For this reason, the above-described effect of suppressing the used memory area according to the present embodiment is enormous in an actual gaming machine.

  Next, a general game count process for measuring a series of control times on the normal symbol game side using one timer function will be described with reference to FIG.

  (2) of FIG. 14 shows the types of data (hereinafter referred to as “general drawing side setting data”) for setting (specifying) the time to be counted on the normal symbol game side. The normal-side setting data is data for setting which period of each period (time) of the normal symbol game is measured. In each period (time) of this normal symbol game, as shown in (2) of FIG. 14, “waiting to pass through the gate”, “ordinary symbol variation display”, “normal symbol stop display”, “During electric Chu open / close control” and “during the second start port effective period” are included.

  “Waiting for gate passage” is a state (period) in which a normal symbol lottery related to this passage can be executed immediately when a game ball passes through the gate 25 to start display of fluctuation of the normal symbol. It is not during the opening / closing control of the tulip 27 (during the opening of the electric chew), it is not during the second starting port effective period, which will be described later, and it is in a state where neither the normal symbol variation display nor the specified time stop display is performed. “Normal symbol change display” is a state (period) in which a normal symbol lottery is executed in accordance with the passage of the game ball through the gate 25 and the normal symbol change display is executed on the display 4. “Normal symbol stop display” is a state (period) in which the normal symbol that has been variably displayed on the display unit 4 is completely stopped and displayed for a specified time (0.5 seconds) in a display mode for notifying the normal symbol lottery result. It is. “During electric Chu open / close control” is a state (period) in which the normal symbol lottery is won and the electric tulip 27 open / close control (electric Chu open game) is being executed. “During the second start port effective period” is a period during which a game ball winning to the second start port 22 is exceptionally recognized for a predetermined period immediately after the opening / closing control of the electric tulip 27 ends. During the opening / closing control of the electric tulip 27 (that is, even when the electric tulip 27 is closed), the game ball winning at the second starting port 22 is recognized as being effective, and the opening / closing control of the electric tulip 27 is being performed. During the period excluding the second start port effective period, the game ball winning to the second start port 22 is not recognized as effective.

  As shown in (2) of FIG. 14, for example, the normal setting side setting data “00K” is data for setting “waiting to pass through the gate”. Further, the normal setting data is stored in the ROM 102.

  Hereinafter, a description will be given with reference to FIG. The area 11B is a timer area for measuring the passage of time for each period of the above-described ordinary symbol game (such as “ordinary symbol variation display”), and measures one passage of time by writing one piece of time data. This is a timer area. The area 10B is an area for setting the type of time to be measured in the area 11B by writing any one of the universal drawing side setting data described with reference to (2) of FIG. In the area 12B, when the normal symbol is variably displayed on the normal symbol display 4e (see FIG. 2), two display modes of the malvaz display (the display mode in which only the circle is lit and the display in which only the symbol is lit) This is a timer area for measuring the time lapse of 48 milliseconds when executing the control of switching the display every 48 milliseconds and alternately displaying them, and writing one time data and measuring one time lapse. This is a timer area.

  The CPU 101 sets the type of period to be measured by the area 11B by writing the normal setting data in the area 10B, and writes the time data to be measured in the area 11B, and every 4 milliseconds in the timer interrupt process of FIG. By subtracting the value of the time data of the area 11B by 1 by the normal game count process executed at the same time, the progress of each period of the normal symbol game is sequentially measured using one timer area (area 11B) in order. To do.

  Further, when the normal symbol variation display time is measured in the area 11B, the CPU 101 writes predetermined time data (“12”) in the area 12B and executes it every 4 milliseconds in the timer interrupt processing of FIG. When the value of the time data of the area 12B is subtracted by 1 by the usual game count process, the predetermined time data ("12") is written again and the display mode of the normal symbol is switched. As a result, when the normal symbol is variably displayed on the normal symbol display 4e, the two display modes of the malvaz display are switched every 48 milliseconds and alternately displayed.

  From the above, according to the present embodiment, the same effect as that of the special figure game counting process already described can be realized in the common figure game counting process.

In the configuration in which the series of control times of the special symbol game described above is measured using one timer function, the first big prize opening 23 or the second big is immediately after the big prize opening validity period in the control of the big hit game. You may provide the big winning opening stop period which does not consider winning to the winning opening 51 effective.
In addition, a control configuration capable of executing the special symbol variation display and special symbol stop display by the first special symbol lottery and the special symbol variation display and special symbol stop display by the second special symbol lottery in parallel, for example, The control time for special symbol variation display and special symbol stop display by one special symbol lottery and the control time for jackpot game by winning the first special symbol lottery are measured using one timer function, while the second The control time for the special symbol variation display and special symbol stop display by the special symbol lottery and the control time for the big hit game by the winning of the second special symbol lottery may be measured using one other timer function.
In addition, when measuring a series of control times of a special symbol game and a normal symbol game using one timer function, the elapsed time to be measured is measured by “addition” processing instead of “subtraction” processing. It is good. In this case, for example, whether or not the value of the timer (11A) on the special symbol game side has reached the time data value “125” indicating the measurement target time (for example, the special symbol stop display time of 0.5 seconds). It becomes control which judges.
Further, as described above, in addition to storing the same time data value in the table of the added variation time portion of FIG. 15 without storing the same time data value redundantly, in the table of the basic variation time portion of FIG. However, the same time data value may not be stored redundantly, but only one may be stored, and the effect of suppressing the used memory area may be further enhanced.
Moreover, you may measure the execution time of the various effects performed by the effect control part 400 grade | etc., By the method demonstrated above.

  This is the end of the description of the control time counting process.

[Start-up switch processing]
FIG. 16 is an example of a detailed flowchart of the start port switch process in step S2 of FIG. Hereinafter, the start port switch process in step S2 of FIG. 13 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S201, the CPU 101 of the main control unit 100 wins a game ball in the first start port 21 based on the presence or absence of an output signal from the first start port switch 111a, and the first start port switch 111a is turned on. It is determined whether or not. If the determination in step S201 is YES, the process proceeds to step S202. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S207.

  In step S 202, the CPU 101 reads the upper limit value Umax 1 (“4” in the present embodiment) of the first special symbol lottery number from the ROM 102, and the first special symbol lottery number U 1 stored in the RAM 103 is the upper limit value. It is determined whether or not the value is less than Umax1. If the determination in step S202 is YES, the process proceeds to step S203, and if this determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S207.

  In step S <b> 203, the CPU 101 updates the value of the holding number U <b> 1 stored in the RAM 103 to a value obtained by adding one. Further, the CPU 101 sets a winning command in the RAM 103 for notifying the effect control unit 400 that a game ball has won the first starting port 21. This winning command is transmitted to the effect control unit 400 by the output process in step S9 of FIG. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S204.

  In step S204, the CPU 101 acquires a set of random numbers (big hit random number, symbol random number, reach random number, and variation pattern random number) used for the first special symbol lottery and the like, and each set of random numbers acquired (game information) Are stored in the RAM 103 in chronological order. It should be noted that each time the value of the first special symbol lottery holding number U1 is decremented by 1 in the process of step S406 of FIG. 17 described later, the random number set stored in the RAM 103 is one set in order from the earliest storage time Deleted one by one. From this, for example, when the value of the number of holdings U1 of the first special symbol lottery is “3”, the last three random number sets acquired by the process of the last three steps S204 are stored in the RAM 103 in time series order. It will be stored. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S205.

  In step S205, the CPU 101 performs a preliminary determination process. Specifically, the CPU 101 acquires a random number set such as a big hit random number obtained in the latest processing of step S204 and stored in the RAM 103 (that is, a random number set such as a big hit random number for the first special symbol lottery stored most recently. ) And whether or not the result of the first special symbol lottery using the jackpot random number is a jackpot based on whether or not the jackpot random number or the like matches a predetermined value or the like stored in the ROM 102, reach It is determined in advance whether or not to execute the production. That is, the determination necessary for executing the pre-reading notice effect and the hold change notice effect is made in advance prior to the processing of steps S407 and S408 in FIG. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S206.

  In step S <b> 206, the CPU 101 sets a first hold number increase command for notifying that the hold number of the first special symbol lottery has increased by 1 in the RAM 103. Here, the first pending number increase command includes information (hereinafter referred to as “preliminary determination information”) indicating the result of the preliminary determination performed in the process of step S205. In addition, the 1st reservation number increase command containing this prior determination information is output by the output process of step S9 of FIG. The main control unit 100 notifies the effect control unit 400 before the change starts. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S207.

  In step S207, the CPU 101 determines whether or not a game ball has won the second start port 22 and the second start port switch 111b is turned on based on the presence or absence of an output signal from the second start port switch 111b. To do. If the determination in step S207 is YES, the process proceeds to step S208. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S3 (gate switch process) in FIG.

  In step S <b> 208, the CPU 101 reads the upper limit value Umax <b> 2 of the second special symbol lottery holding number from the ROM 102 (“4” in the present embodiment), and the second special symbol lottery holding number U <b> 2 stored in the RAM 103 is the upper limit. It is determined whether or not the value is less than Umax2. If the determination in step S208 is YES, the process proceeds to step S209, and if this determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S3 (gate switch process) in FIG.

  In step S209, the CPU 101 updates the value of the holding number U2 stored in the RAM 103 to a value obtained by adding 1. Further, the CPU 101 sets a winning command in the RAM 103 for notifying the effect control unit 400 that a game ball has won the second starting port 22. This winning command is transmitted to the effect control unit 400 by the output process in step S9 of FIG. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S210.

  In step S210, the CPU 101 obtains a set of random numbers (big hit random number, symbol random number, reach random number, and variation pattern random number) used for the second special symbol lottery, etc. They are stored in the RAM 103 in order. Note that each time the value of the second special symbol lottery holding number U2 is decremented by 1 in the process of step S404 of FIG. 17 described later, the random number set stored in the RAM 103 is one set in order from the earliest stored time. Deleted one by one. For this reason, for example, when the value of the holding number U2 of the second special symbol lottery is “3”, the last three random number sets acquired by the processing of the last three steps S210 are stored in the RAM 103 in time series order. It will be stored. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S211.

  In step S211, the CPU 101 performs a preliminary determination process. Specifically, the CPU 101 acquires a random number set such as a big hit random number acquired in the process of the latest step S210 and stored in the RAM 103 (that is, a random number set such as a big hit random number for the second special symbol lottery stored most recently. ) And whether or not the result of the second special symbol lottery using the jackpot random number is a jackpot based on whether or not the jackpot random number or the like matches a predetermined value or the like stored in the ROM 102, reach It is determined in advance whether or not to execute the production. That is, the determination necessary for executing the pre-reading notice effect and the hold change notice effect is made in advance prior to the processing of steps S407 and S408 in FIG. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S212.

  In step S <b> 212, the CPU 101 sets a second hold number increase command for notifying that the hold number of the second special symbol lottery has increased by 1 in the RAM 103. Here, the second pending number increase command includes information (preliminary determination information) indicating the result of the preliminary determination performed in the process of step S211. It should be noted that the second reserved number increase command including this prior determination information is output by the output process of step S9 in FIG. 13, so that the lottery result for the second special symbol lottery is the symbol in the second special symbol lottery. The main control unit 100 notifies the effect control unit 400 before the change starts. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3 (gate switch process) in FIG.

[Special symbol processing]
FIG. 17 is an example of a detailed flowchart of the special symbol process in step S4 of FIG. Below, with reference to FIG. 17, the special symbol process in step S4 of FIG. 13 is demonstrated.

  First, in step S401, the CPU 101 of the main control unit 100 determines that the current state of the gaming machine 1 is a big hit game (a big hit game state) based on information stored in the RAM 103 (information based on a big hit game flag described later). It is determined whether or not. That is, it is determined whether or not the big hit game (special game) that is executed when the special symbol lottery is won. If the determination in step S401 is YES, the process proceeds to step S5 (normal symbol process) in FIG. 13, and if this determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S402.

  In step S402, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol change display is being performed by the first special symbol display 4a or the second special symbol display 4b. Here, the special symbol variation display means that the special symbol has a predetermined variation time (variation time determined by a variation pattern selected by a variation pattern selection process in step S408 described later) after a variation display, This means that the determination symbol indicating the determination result of the symbol lottery is within the entire period during which a predetermined fixed time (for example, a predetermined 0.5 second) is stopped and displayed. Therefore, in other words, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol is being changed or the determination symbol is being stopped. If the determination in step S402 is yes, the process proceeds to step S411. If the determination is no, the process proceeds to step S403.

  In step S403, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the holding number U2 stored in the RAM 103 is 1 or more (that is, whether or not the second special symbol lottery is held). If the determination in step S403 is YES, the process proceeds to step S404. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S405.

  In step S <b> 404, the CPU 101 updates the hold number U <b> 2 stored in the RAM 103 to a value obtained by subtracting one. At that time, the CPU 101 reads out the random number set stored in the RAM 103 and stored in the step S210 in FIG. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S407.

  On the other hand, in step S405, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the holding number U1 stored in the RAM 103 is 1 or more (that is, whether or not the first special symbol lottery is held). If the determination in step S405 is YES, the process proceeds to step S406. If this determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S415 assuming that there is no special symbol lottery to be executed.

  In step S <b> 406, the CPU 101 updates the hold number U <b> 1 stored in the RAM 103 to a value obtained by subtracting one. At that time, the CPU 101 reads out the random number set stored in the RAM 103 and stored in the step S204 in FIG. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S407.

  The second special symbol lottery is executed in preference to the first special symbol lottery by the processing of steps S403 to S406 described above.

  In step S407, the CPU 101 executes a big hit determination process for determining whether the special symbol lottery is a big win or a loss. Specifically, when executing the process of step S407 following the process of step S404, the CPU 101 matches the jackpot random number read from the RAM 103 in the process of step S404 with the jackpot winning value stored in the ROM 102. Whether the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit or a loss is determined based on whether or not to do so. On the other hand, when executing the process of step S407 following the process of step S406, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the jackpot random number read from the RAM 103 in the process of step S406 matches the jackpot winning value stored in the ROM 102. Based on this, it is determined whether the result of the first special symbol lottery is a big hit or a loss. When the result of the special symbol lottery is determined to be lost, the CPU 101 sets a lost symbol indicating that the special symbol lottery has been lost in the RAM 103 as a special symbol stop symbol in the setting information. On the other hand, when the CPU 101 determines that the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit, which of the predetermined values stored in the ROM 102 matches the symbol random number read from the RAM 103 together with the big hit random number used for this determination? Based on this, the type of jackpot of this time is determined. Then, the CPU 101 sets, in the RAM 103, information on the jackpot symbol representing the jackpot and the type of jackpot as information on the stop symbol of the special symbol in the setting information. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S408.

  In step S408, the CPU 101 executes a variation pattern selection process for selecting a special symbol variation time. Hereinafter, the variation pattern selection process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is an example of a detailed flowchart of the variation pattern selection process in step S408 of FIG.

[Variation pattern selection processing]
In step S4081 in FIG. 18, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the normal time reduction flag stored in the RAM 103 is ON. Here, the normal short time flag is set to “OFF” to control the gaming state in the non-short time state and the non-electric support state, and when set to “ON”, the gaming state is in the short time state and the electric support state. And is initially set to “OFF”. By the processing in step S6253 or step S6255 in FIG. 29 described later, a big hit (that is, a continuous big hit) It is set to “ON” after a big hit game. In other words, in step S4081, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the gaming state is a short time state (electric support state) after a big hit game of continuous big hit or single hit big hit. If the determination in step S4081 is YES, the process proceeds to step S4085, and if this determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S4082.

  In step S4082, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the special time reduction flag stored in the RAM 103 is ON. Here, the special short time flag is set to “OFF” to control the gaming state in the non-short time state and the non-electric support state, and when set to “ON”, the gaming state is in the short time state and the electric support state. This flag is set to “OFF” as an initial setting, and is set to “ON” after the big hit game of the sudden big hit (big hit C) by the processing in step S6257 of FIG. 29 described later. In other words, in step S4082, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the gaming state is a short-time state (electric support state) after a big hit game in a sudden hit. If the determination in step S4082 is YES (ie, if the time is short after a big hit), the process proceeds to step S4084, and if this determination is NO (ie, the non-time-short state (latent game in this embodiment). If no state is provided and the game state is a normal gaming state), the process proceeds to step S4083.

  In step S4083, the CPU 101 sets HT1-1 (see FIG. 19) or HT1-2 (see FIG. 20) as a variation pattern determination table used when selecting a variation pattern. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S4088.

  In step S4084, the CPU 101 sets HT3 (see FIG. 23) as a variation pattern determination table used when selecting a variation pattern. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S4088.

  In step S4085, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the high-accuracy flag stored in the RAM 103 is ON. Here, the high probability flag is a flag in which the gaming state is controlled in a low probability state by being set to “OFF”, and the gaming state is controlled in a high probability state by being set to “ON”. The initial setting is set to “OFF”, and is set to “ON” by processing in step S6252 of FIG. 29 described later. Therefore, in step S4085, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the gaming state is a highly probable state after the big hit game. If the determination in step S4085 is YES (i.e., if the time is short and continuous after a big hit), the process moves to step S4086, and if this determination is NO (that is, the time is short after a single big hit and In the case of a low probability state), the process proceeds to step S4087.

  In step S4086, the CPU 101 sets HT2-1 (see FIG. 21) or HT2-2 (see FIG. 22) as a variation pattern determination table used when selecting a variation pattern. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S4088.

  In step S4087, the CPU 101 sets HT4 (see FIG. 24) as a variation pattern determination table used when selecting a variation pattern. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S4088.

  In step S4088, the CPU 101 selects a variation pattern (variation time of special symbol) based on the set variation table set, and the process proceeds to step S409 in FIG.

  Here, the details of the process of selecting a fluctuation pattern using the fluctuation pattern determination tables HT1-1, HT1-2, HT2-1, HT2-2, HT3, and HT4 (the process of step S4089) described above will be described with reference to FIG. Description will be made with reference to FIG. Here, this variation pattern is a special symbol variation time that is a time from when the special symbol is variably displayed on the display 4 until it is stopped and displayed, and this special symbol variation time is synchronized with the execution time of the notification effect. It is the same time as the notification effect execution time. In the following, the variation pattern determination tables HT1-1, HT1-2, HT2-1, HT2-2, HT3, and HT4 are simply referred to as HT1-1, HT1-2, HT2-1, HT2-2, HT3. And HT4.

First, the case where a variation pattern is selected using HT1-1 and HT1-2 shown in FIGS. 19 and 20 in the normal gaming state (non-time-short state) will be described. FIG. 19 is a table used for determining the variation pattern when the first special symbol lottery is executed in the process of step S407 in the normal gaming state (non-time saving state). FIG. 20 is a table used for determining the variation pattern when the second special symbol lottery is executed in the process of step S407 in the normal gaming state (non-short-time state).

[Normal game state / variation pattern selection process in the first special symbol lottery]
Hereinafter, the determination of the variation pattern when the first special symbol lottery is executed in the process of step S407 in the normal gaming state (non-time-short state) will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S408, when the CPU 101 determines in the jackpot determination process of step S407 that the result of the first special symbol lottery is a jackpot, the CPU 101 determines a variation pattern (special symbol variation time) based on the variation pattern random number. Specifically, the CPU 101 determines that the variation pattern random number (any one of 0 to 299) read from the RAM 103 together with the big hit random number used in the big hit determination process in step S407 is the “big hit” of HT1-1. The variation pattern (special symbol variation time) is determined based on which of the random number values assigned to each variation pattern of the portion of (). For example, when the variation pattern random number read from the RAM 103 together with the big hit random number used in the big hit determination process in step S407 is “78”, the CPU 101 sets the fluctuation pattern “90.03” of the “big hit” portion of HT1-1. Since it matches the random value “75 to 124” assigned to “second”, “90.03 seconds” is determined as the variation pattern. Here, as indicated by HT1-1, the fluctuation pattern of the “big hit” portion is “15.01 seconds”, “15.02 seconds”, “40.01 seconds”, “40.02 seconds”, “90. “01 seconds”, “90.02 seconds”, “90.03 seconds”, “90.04 seconds”, and “90.05 seconds” indicate the types of effect patterns of the notification effect “per reach” and “pseudo 1”, respectively. Corresponds to "per", "per pseudo-2", "per SP", "per pseudo3", "per fourth SPSP", "per third SPSP", "per second SPSP", and "per first SPSP". In addition, “per reach” is a type that hits big after reach is established, “per SP” is a type that hits big after finally developing to SP reach, and “per first SPSP” to “per fourth SPSP” It is the type that hits big after finally developing to various SPSP reach. In addition, although mentioned later for details, in this embodiment, a selective theater reach production (refer FIG. 67, FIG. 68 mentioned later) is performed as one of the 4th SPSP reach productions, and a partial theater is carried out as one of the SP reach productions. A reach effect (see FIGS. 67 and 68 described later) is executed. In addition, “per pseudo 1”, “per pseudo 2”, and “per pseudo 3” are pseudo displays in which a decorative symbol once temporarily stopped and displayed is variably displayed after the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in a pseudo-continuous pattern. It is a type that wins big through the series production. Here, the quasi-continuous symbol is a decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed as a trigger for re-variable display, and is, for example, a “7” symbol. Further, the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol means that the player can stop in a manner that the player can recognize that the variation of the decorative symbol has stopped, and is not completely stopped. Is displayed. This indicates that the special symbol is still changing. More specifically, “per pseudo 1” is a type in which a big hit is made after a pseudo continuous effect that is displayed once again, and “per 2 pseudo” is a type of pseudo continuous effect that is displayed twice. This is a type that makes a big hit after passing through, and “pseudo 3 per” is a type that makes a big hit after passing through a pseudo-continuous effect redisplayed three times. Further, as will be apparent from the following description, in this pseudo-continuous effect, it is suggested that the greater the number of re-variable displays (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as pseudo-continuous times), the higher the reliability of the big hit. Note that the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol means that the player can stop in a manner that the player can recognize that the variation of the decorative symbol has stopped, and it is not completely stopped. Is displayed. This indicates that the special symbol is still changing.

  Reach (reach effect) is specified in combination with other symbols that have already been stopped when a decorative symbol that is stopped last among a plurality of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed in a specific symbol. It is an effect that expects to win a big hit by matching the pattern pattern of, and typically, the decorative pattern on the right side and the left side are stopped at the same pattern (for example, 7), This is an effect that is variably displayed with the expectation that the decorative symbol stops at the same symbol (for example, 7) (that is, it becomes a doublet 777). The SP reach is generally referred to as super reach or special reach, and is an effect that further expects to win more than reach, for example, an effect of a moving image in which a hero character plays a mini game. In addition, SPSP reach is generally called super super reach or special special reach, and is an effect that further expects a big hit than SP reach production. For example, it is a production of a moving image in which a hero character fights against an enemy character. is there.

  Further, when the CPU 101 determines that the result of the first special symbol lottery is a loss in the jackpot determination process of step S407, the CPU 101 is based on the first special symbol lottery holding number (U1), the reach random number, and the fluctuation pattern random number. To determine the variation pattern (special symbol variation time).

  Specifically, the CPU 101 determines the reach random number (0) read from the RAM 103 together with the jackpot random number used in the jackpot determination process in step S407 when the number of the first special symbol lottery is “1” or “2”. Or any one of 99 to 99) is included in the reach random number value range “0 to 69” of the retained number “1, 2” of the “losing” of HT1-1. 99 ”is determined.

  When the read reach random number is included in the reach random number value range “0 to 69”, the CPU 101 reads the fluctuation pattern random number (0 ˜299) is included in the fluctuation pattern random value range “0-59” or in the fluctuation pattern random value range “60-299”. Then, when the fluctuation pattern random number is included in the fluctuation pattern random value range “0 to 59”, the CPU 101 determines “8.00 seconds” as the fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation pattern random number is changed to the fluctuation pattern random value range “ In the case of “60 to 299”, “13.50 seconds” is determined as the variation pattern. Here, as indicated by HT1-1, the variation patterns “8.00 seconds” and “13.50 seconds” both correspond to the effect pattern type “immediately lost”. “Immediately lost” is a type of production pattern that immediately loses without reaching reach.

  On the other hand, when the read reach random number is included in the reach random number value range “70 to 99”, the CPU 101 reads the variation pattern random number (0) read from the RAM 103 together with the big hit random number used in the big hit determination process in step S407. ˜299) is included in the variation pattern random value range assigned to each variation pattern in the above reach random value range “70 to 99” of HT1-1. Then, the variation pattern (special symbol variation time) is determined. For example, when the variation pattern random number read from the RAM 103 together with the jackpot random number used in the jackpot determination process in step S407 is “260”, the CPU 101 determines the variation pattern random value assigned to the variation pattern “40.03 seconds”. Since it is included in the range “256 to 271”, “40.03 seconds” is determined as the variation pattern. Here, as indicated by HT1-1, the fluctuation patterns “15.03 seconds”, “15.04 seconds”, “40.03 seconds” of the above-described reach random number value range “70 to 99” of HT1-1. ”,“ 40.04 seconds ”,“ 90.06 seconds ”,“ 90.07 seconds ”,“ 90.08 seconds ”,“ 90.09 seconds ”, and“ 90.10 seconds ” Production pattern types “Leach Loss”, “Pseudo 1 Loss”, “Pseudo 2 Loss”, “SP Loss”, “Pseudo 3 Loss”, “4th SPSP Loss”, “3rd SPSP Loss”, “2nd SPSP Loss” and “ This corresponds to “first SPSP loss”. In addition, “Leach Loss” is a type that loses after the reach is established, “SP Loss” is a type that finally loses after reaching SP reach, and “First SPSP Loss” to “4th SPSP Loss” are final. In particular, it is a type that loses after developing to various SPSP reach. “Pseudo 1 Loss”, “Pseudo 2 Loss”, and “Pseudo 3 Loss” each have a re-variable display number (pseudo continuous number) of 1 and 2 respectively. This is a type that loses after three or three pseudo-continuous productions.

  In addition, when the number of the first special symbol lottery is “3”, the CPU 101 basically performs the variation pattern in the same manner as when the number of the first special symbol lottery is “1” or “2”. To decide. However, when the number of holdings of the first special symbol lottery is “3”, as shown in HT1-1, the CPU 101 has the number of holdings of the first special symbol lottery being “1” or “2”. On the other hand, the reach random value range “0-69” is replaced with “0-79”, the reach random value range “70-99” is replaced with “80-99”, and the fluctuation pattern “8.00 seconds”. The variable pattern random value range “0 to 59” assigned to “0” to “209” is replaced with “0 to 209”, and the fluctuation pattern random value range “60 to 299” assigned to the fluctuation pattern “13.50 seconds” is changed to “210 to 299”. The variation pattern is determined by the random value range replaced with “”.

  In addition, when the number of holds for the first special symbol lottery is “4”, the CPU 101 basically performs the variation pattern similarly to the case where the number of holds for the first special symbol lottery is “1” or “2”. To decide. However, when the number of the first special symbol lottery is “4”, the CPU 101, as shown in HT1-1, when the number of the first special symbol lottery is “1” or “2”. On the other hand, the reach random value range “0-69” is replaced with “0-84”, the reach random value range “70-99” is replaced with “85-99”, and the fluctuation pattern “8.00 seconds” The variable pattern random value range “0 to 59” allocated to the variable pattern is replaced with “210 to 269”, and the random pattern value range “60 to 299” allocated to the variable pattern “13.50 seconds” is converted to “270 to 299”. In addition, according to the random value range of the content to which the variation pattern “3.00 seconds” to which the variation pattern random value range “0 to 209” is assigned in correspondence with the production pattern type “immediately lost” is added, Deciding the fluctuation pattern To.

  As described above using the variation pattern determination table HT1-1 shown in FIG. 19, in the case of a loss in the first special symbol lottery in the normal gaming state (non-time-short state), the number of first special symbol lottery holds The smaller the variation is, the easier it is to select the variation pattern with reach, and when the variation pattern without reach is selected, the smaller the number of the first special symbol lottery is, the easier the variation pattern is selected.

[Big hit reliability]
Here, the jackpot reliability (expectation for jackpot) will be described. An effect with a high jackpot reliability is an effect that is highly likely to be notified of a big hit when the effect is executed, and an effect with a low jackpot reliability is a notification of a big hit when the effect is executed. It is a production that is unlikely to be performed. Hereinafter, it demonstrates concretely using HT1-1 shown in FIG. As can be seen from the “big hit” portion of HT1-1, in the case of big hit, “per reach”, “per pseudo 1”, “per pseudo 2”, “per SP”, “per pseudo 3”, “ The variation pattern random value range increases in the order of “per 4 SPSP”, “per third SPSP”, “per second SPSP”, and “per first SPSP” (they are partly the same). On the other hand, as can be seen from the “losing” portion of HT1-1, in the case of losing, “reach losing”, “pseudo 1 losing”, “pseudo 2 losing”, “SP losing”, “pseudo 3 losing”, In the order of “4th SPSP Loss”, “3rd SPSP Loss”, “2nd SPSP Loss”, “1st SPSP Loss”, the variation pattern random value range becomes smaller (partially the same). As can be seen from the above, the performance that is easy to execute in the case of a big hit and difficult to execute in the case of a loss is high in the reliability of the big hit, while the effect that is difficult to execute in the case of big hit and is easy to be executed in the case of a loss has a big hit reliability. Low. That is, “reach effect”, “pseudo-continuous effect with one pseudo-continuous operation (pseudo-one effect)”, “pseudo-continuous effect with two pseudo-continuous times (pseudo-two effect)”, “SP reach effect”, “ The big hit reliability is high in the order of three-time pseudo-continuous production (pseudo-3 production), “fourth SPSP reach production”, “third SPSP reach production”, “second SPSP reach production”, “first SPSP reach production”. Become. Further, from the viewpoint of the length of the fluctuation time, it can be seen that the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the performance of the big hit reliability.

[Normal gaming state / variation pattern selection process in the second special symbol lottery]
Hereinafter, the determination of the variation pattern when the second special symbol lottery is executed in the process of step S407 in the normal gaming state (non-time-short state) will be described with reference to FIG. In step S408, the CPU 101 determines the variation pattern by performing basically the same processing as the variation pattern determination processing described with reference to FIG. However, the CPU 101 performed processing for the first special symbol lottery using HT1-1 in the variation pattern determination processing described with reference to FIG. 19, whereas in the variation pattern determination processing illustrated in FIG. It is different in that processing is performed on the second special symbol lottery using HT1-2 shown in FIG. Here, HT1-2 shown in FIG. 20 is different from HT1-1 shown in FIG. 19 in that “the number of holdings of the first special symbol lottery” is replaced with “the number of holdings of the second special symbol lottery”. Only different. That is, while the variation pattern determination process described with reference to FIG. 19 considers the number of first special symbol lottery reservations, the variation pattern determination process considers the number of second special symbol lottery reservations. The It should be noted that in the non-time-saving state, since it is difficult for a game ball to win the second starting port 22, it is rare (rare) to execute the second special symbol lottery. For this reason, when the second special symbol lottery is executed in the non-time-short state, in order to suggest this rare feeling, the fluctuation pattern is longer than when the first special symbol lottery is executed in the non-time-short state. May be easily selected. Specifically, for example, in HT1-2, the reach random number value range that is determined to be reachable in each portion of the “losing” hold number “1, 2,” “3”, “4” is HT1. By setting it to be larger than the corresponding portion of −1, it is possible that the reach is more easily executed than HT1-1, and as a result, a long-time variation pattern may be easily selected.

[Time-saving gaming state after a single big hit / Fluctuation pattern selection process in the first special symbol lottery]
Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 21, the determination of the variation pattern when the first special symbol lottery is executed in the process of step S407 in the short-time game state after the single-hit big hit (big hit B in FIG. 6) in the short-time game state. Will be described. In step S408, the CPU 101 determines the variation pattern by performing basically the same processing as the variation pattern determination processing described with reference to FIG. However, the CPU 101 performs processing for the first special symbol lottery using HT1-1 in the variation pattern determination processing described with reference to FIG. 19, whereas in the variation pattern determination processing illustrated in FIG. It differs by the point which processes with respect to a 1st special symbol lottery using HT2-1 shown. Here, HT2-1 shown in FIG. 21 is related to the number of holdings of the first special symbol lottery when “no reach” is selected by “reach random number” in “losing” with respect to HT1-1 shown in FIG. The difference is that the variation pattern “13.50 seconds” (corresponding to immediate loss) is selected.

[Time-saving gaming state after a single big hit / Fluctuation pattern selection process in the second special symbol lottery]
Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 22, the determination of the variation pattern when the second special symbol lottery is executed in the processing of step S407 in the short-time game state after the single-hit big hit (big hit B in FIG. 6) among the short-time game states. Will be described. In step S408, the CPU 101 determines the variation pattern by performing basically the same processing as the variation pattern determination processing described with reference to FIG. However, the CPU 101 performed processing for the first special symbol lottery using HT1-1 in the variation pattern determination processing described with reference to FIG. 19, whereas in the variation pattern determination processing illustrated in FIG. It is different in that processing is performed for the second special symbol lottery using HT2-2 shown in FIG. Here, as shown in FIG. 22, HT2-2 replaces HT1-1 shown in FIG. 19 with “the number of holdings for the first special symbol lottery” replaced with “the number of holdings for the second special symbol lottery”. ing. That is, while the variation pattern determination process described with reference to FIG. 19 considers the number of first special symbol lottery reservations, the variation pattern determination process considers the number of second special symbol lottery reservations. The Further, as shown in FIG. 22, in HT2-2, when the number of holds in the second special symbol lottery “1” in “losing” is “1” and no reach is selected by the reach random number, the variation pattern “13” is uniformly set. .50 seconds "is determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 22, in HT2-2, when no reach is selected by the reach random number in the case of the holding number “2-4” of the second special symbol lottery in “losing”, the fluctuation pattern random value The variation pattern “2.00 seconds” is determined in the range “0 to 239”, the variation pattern “4.00 seconds” is determined in the variation pattern random value range “240 to 269”, and the variation pattern random value range “270 to 270”. In “299”, the fluctuation pattern “10.00 seconds” is determined.

  Here, as described in the processing in steps S403 to S406, in this embodiment, the second special symbol lottery hold is digested in preference to the first special symbol lottery hold. Further, in the short-time state, as described in the processing in steps S5 and S7 in FIG. 13, the electric tulip 27 is frequently opened for a long period of time, and the game balls are frequently won at the second start port 22. Special symbol lottery is executed frequently and continuously. In addition, as described above with reference to FIG. 6, the second special symbol lottery by winning the game ball to the second starting port 22 is more effective than the first special symbol lottery by winning the game ball to the first starting port 21. However, the profit level when winning the lottery (big hit) is large. In other words, it can be said that if the first special symbol lottery is executed in the short-time state, there is a high possibility that the player will win a big hit with a small profit level of the player. In the present embodiment, as described above with reference to HT2-2 in FIG. 22, in the short-time state after a single big hit, the number of second special symbol lottery holding is 2 to 4 and the reach is short. While the time variation pattern (2.00 seconds, 4.00 seconds) can be easily selected and the second special symbol lottery is suspended at a high speed, a game with a sense of speed is executed. When the number of special symbol lotteries held is 1 and there is no reach, be sure to select a long-term fluctuation pattern (13.50 seconds) to control the first special symbol lottery that is relatively unfavorable to the player. Yes. Further, in the present embodiment, as described above with reference to HT2-1 in FIG. 21, even if the first special symbol lottery that is relatively disadvantageous to the player is executed in the short-time state after a single big hit, In all of the first special symbol lottery holding numbers 1 to 4, when there is no reach, a long-term fluctuation pattern (13.50 seconds) must be selected, and a game ball wins at the second starting port 22 Thus, control is performed to earn time for the second special symbol lottery that is relatively advantageous to the player to be executed.

[Short-time gaming state after a big hit / Changing pattern selection process in the 1st and 2nd special symbol lottery]
Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 23, the first special symbol lottery (or the second special symbol lottery) is performed in the processing of step S407 in the short-time gaming state after the sudden big hit (big hit C in FIG. 6) among the short-time gaming states. The determination of the variation pattern when it is executed will be described. The CPU 101 determines the variation pattern by performing basically the same processing as the variation pattern determination processing described with reference to FIG. However, in the process of determining the variation pattern, the HT3 shown in FIG. 23 is used, and the first special symbol lottery (or the second special symbol lottery) is not dependent on the hold number, the reach random number, and the variation pattern random number. The variation pattern is determined depending on the number of variations of the special symbol (hereinafter referred to as the “short-time / medium-speed”) after the short-time gaming state is started.

  Specifically, when the CPU 101 determines that the result of the first special symbol lottery (or the second special symbol lottery) is a big hit in the big hit determination process of step S407, From this, the variation pattern (special symbol variation time) is determined according to the short- and middle-speed. In other words, as shown in FIG. 23, in HT3, when the speed / medium speed is “one time” and the “big hit”, the fluctuation pattern “68.00 seconds” is determined, and the speed / medium speed is When “2-6 times” is “big hit”, the fluctuation pattern “60.00 seconds” is determined, and when the time-short / medium speed is “7-12 times”, “big hit” , The variation pattern “48.00 seconds” is determined, and when the speed / medium speed is “13 to 18 times”, the variation pattern “36.00 seconds” is determined. In the case of “19-24 times” in the case where the hourly speed is “19-24 times”, the fluctuation pattern “24.00 seconds” is determined, and in the case where the hourly, middle speed is “25-30 times”, “ In the case of “big hit”, the fluctuation pattern “12 00 seconds "is determined. As described above, in HT3, in the case of big hit, the variation pattern (special symbol variation time) determined as the number of rotations in the short time is increased. On the other hand, if the CPU 101 determines that the result of the first special symbol lottery (or the second special symbol lottery) is a loss in the big hit determination process in step S407, the CPU 101 selects the “lost” portion of HT3 from the “shortage” portion. When the medium speed is “1”, the fluctuation pattern “9.50 seconds” is determined, and when the medium speed is “2 to 30 times”, the fluctuation pattern “1.50 seconds” is determined. . Here, as shown in HT3, the fluctuation patterns “68.00 seconds”, “60.00 seconds”, “48.00 seconds”, “36.00 seconds”, “24.00 seconds”, “12.00” “Second”, “9.50 seconds”, and “1.50 seconds” are the types of effect patterns of notification effects “per rotation”, “per first scale”, “per second scale”, “ This corresponds to "per third scale", "per fourth scale", "per fifth scale", "first rotation loss", and "short loss". These types of performance patterns are the types of performance patterns that are executed in the short-time game state after the big hit, and the details will be described later. This is a decorative effect variation effect of which the scale is adjusted such that the post-crash dedicated effect is executed for a specified time without being linked to the rear dedicated effect.

[Variation pattern selection process in probability variation game state]
In the following, when the first special symbol lottery (or the second special symbol lottery) is executed in the process of step S407 in the probability variation gaming state after the continuous big hit (big hit A or big hit D in FIG. 6) using FIG. The determination of the variation pattern in will be described. The CPU 101 determines the variation pattern by performing basically the same processing as the variation pattern determination processing described with reference to FIG. However, in this variation pattern determination process, the variation pattern is determined depending on only the big hit or the loss using the HT4 shown in FIG.

  Specifically, when the CPU 101 determines that the result of the first special symbol lottery (or the second special symbol lottery) is a big hit in the big hit determination process of step S407, the fluctuation corresponding to the “big hit” of HT4 When the pattern “4.50” seconds is determined, and it is determined that the result of the first special symbol lottery (or the second special symbol lottery) is lost in the big hit determination process of step S407, the “lost” of HT4 is set. The corresponding variation pattern “0.50” seconds is determined. Here, as shown in HT3, the variation patterns “4.50 seconds” and “0.50 seconds” correspond to the types of “short hits” and “very short loses” of the effect pattern of the notification effect, respectively. These types of effect patterns are the types of effect patterns that are executed in the probability variation gaming state after the consecutive big hit, and the details will be described later, but the selection effect (selected by the player selected in the probability variation gaming state state). This is a fluctuating effect in which decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner for a fixed time without being linked to a possible effect).

  Information on the variation pattern determined in step S408 as described above (that is, it can be said that the execution time of the notification effect: the information about the type of the effect pattern of the notification effect) is set in the RAM 103 as setting information. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S409.

  In step S409, the CPU 101 generates a notification effect start command including the setting information set by the jackpot determination process in step S407 and the setting information set by the variation pattern selection process in step S408, and sets the notification effect start command in the RAM 103. Here, the notification effect start command is a command for instructing the effect control unit 400 to start the notification effect by the image display unit 6, the speaker 35, and the like. The setting information included in the notification effect start command includes information indicating which of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery has been executed. Further, the CPU 101 sets a gaming state notification command indicating the current gaming state (for example, a probable variation gaming state) in the RAM 103. The notification effect start command and the gaming state notification command described above are transmitted to the effect control unit 400 by the output process in step S9 of FIG. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S410.

  In step S410, the CPU 101 changes the special symbol by the first special symbol display 4a or the second special symbol display 4b based on the setting information included in the notification effect start command set in the process of step S409. Start display. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S411.

  In step S411, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol variation time indicated by the variation pattern set in the variation pattern selection process in step S408 has elapsed since the start of the special symbol variation display in step S410. If the determination in step S411 is YES, the process proceeds to step S412. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S5 (ordinary symbol process) in FIG.

  In step S <b> 412, the CPU 101 sets a notification effect stop command (design confirmation command) instructing the end of the notification effect by the image display unit 6 or the like in the RAM 103. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S413. Note that the notification effect stop command set in step S412 is transmitted to the effect control unit 400 by the output process in step S9 of FIG.

  In step S413, the CPU 101 ends the special symbol variation display by the first special symbol display 4a or the second special symbol display 4b started in the process of step S410. When the special symbol variation display is terminated by the processing of step S413, the determination symbol indicating the determination result of the special symbol lottery is stopped and displayed for a predetermined fixed time (for example, 0.5 seconds). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S414.

  In step S414, the CPU 101 executes a stop process. Here, the stop process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a detailed flowchart showing an example of the stop process in step S414 of FIG.

  First, in step S4141 in FIG. 25, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the big hit determination process in step S407 in FIG. . If the determination in step S4141 is YES, the process proceeds to step S4142, and if this determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S4144.

  In step S4142, the CPU 101 instructs the effect control unit 400 to start the jackpot game effect and information indicating the type of the jackpot game effect to start (whether it is a jackpot game effect based on the jackpots A to D). An opening command to be included is set in the RAM 103. Note that this opening command is executed in step S9 of FIG. 13 after a predetermined fixed time (0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the stopping process in step S414 was started (after the process in step S413 was completed). It is transmitted to the effect control unit 400 by the output process, thereby starting the big hit game effect. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S4143.

  In step S4143, the CPU 101 sets a gaming state. Specifically, the CPU 101 sets the high-accuracy flag, the normal time-short flag, and the special time-short flag stored in the RAM 103 to “OFF”, and sets the big hit game flag to “ON”. Here, the big hit game flag is set to “ON” to indicate that the big hit game is in progress, and the big hit game is ended by being set to “OFF” by the process of step S624 in FIG. 27 described later. Is shown. In the process of step S4143, the above-described various flags have passed a predetermined fixed time (0.5 seconds) after the stop process of step S414 is started (after the process of step S413 is completed). Then it is set. Thereby, when the big hit game is started, the gaming state is controlled in the big hit gaming state. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S4144.

  In step S4144, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the high-accuracy flag stored in the RAM 103 is “ON”. If the determination in step S4144 is YES, the process proceeds to step S4145, and if this determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S4148.

  In step S4145, the CPU 101 rewrites the value of S stored in the RAM 103 to a value obtained by subtracting one. Here, S is the remaining number of executions (remaining number) of the special symbol lottery in which the game is controlled in the high probability state, and the value of S is “0”. (Ie, the game is controlled in a low probability state). The value of S is set to the specified number of times (“9999” in the present embodiment) when the high-accuracy flag is set to “ON” by the processing in step S6252 of FIG. 29 described later. By the processing of this step S4145, it is shown that the number of remaining special symbol lotteries in which the special symbol lottery is executed once and the game is controlled in a highly accurate state is reduced by one. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S4146.

  In step S4146, the CPU 101 controls whether or not the value of S stored in the RAM 103 (subtracted by the processing in step S4145) is “0”, that is, the current special symbol lottery is performed with high accuracy. It is determined whether it was the last special symbol lottery. If the determination in step S4146 is YES, the process proceeds to step S4147, and if this determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S4148. By the way, when the determination in step S4146 is YES, when the high probability flag is “ON” (that is, when the game is controlled in the high probability state), the process of step S4145 is executed 9999 times. (That is, the special symbol lottery has been continuously executed 9999 times). However, in the highly accurate state, since it is normal to win a big hit before the special symbol lottery is executed 9999 times, in reality, it is not determined YES in the process of step S4146.

  In step S4147, the CPU 101 sets a gaming state. Specifically, the CPU 101 sets the high-accuracy flag stored in the RAM 103 to “OFF”. In the process of step S4147, the above-described high-accuracy flag has a predetermined fixed time (0.5 seconds) after the stop process of step S414 is started (after the process of step S413 is completed). When it has elapsed, it is set to “OFF”. Thereby, when the next special symbol lottery is started, the gaming state is controlled in a low probability state, and the set variation pattern table is changed from HT4 to HT1-1, HT1-2, HT2-1, HT2-2, HT3. Switch to one of the following. Specifically, when the normal time shortening flag is ON, the operation is switched to HT2-1 or HT2-2, when the special time reduction flag is ON, the operation is switched to HT3, and when both the normal time reduction flag and the special time reduction flag are OFF, HT1-1. Or it switches to HT1-2. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S4148.

  In step S4148, the CPU 101 determines whether the normal time reduction flag or the special time reduction flag stored in the RAM 103 is “ON”. If the determination in step S4148 is YES, the process proceeds to step S4149. If this determination is NO, the in-stop process ends, and the process proceeds to step S5 (normal symbol process) in FIG.

  In step S4149, the CPU 101 rewrites the value of J stored in the RAM 103 to a value obtained by subtracting one. Here, J is the remaining number of executions (remaining number) of the special symbol lottery in which the game is controlled in the time-saving state (electric support state), and that the value of J is “0” is no longer in the time-saving state ( This indicates that the game is not controlled in the electric support state (that is, the game is controlled in the non-time-saving state (non-electric support state)). Note that the value of J is the specified number of times when the normal time reduction flag is set to “ON” or the special time reduction flag is set to “ON” by the processing in step S6253, step S6255, or step S6257 of FIG. In this embodiment, “9999”, “100”, or “30”) is set. By the processing of this step S4149, it is shown that the number of remaining special symbol lotteries in which the special symbol lottery is executed once and the game is controlled in the short-time state (electric support state) has decreased by one. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S4150.

  In step S4150, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of J stored in the RAM 103 (subtracted by the processing in step S4149) is “0”, that is, the current special symbol lottery is in the short time state (electric support state). ) Is determined whether it was the last special symbol lottery controlled. If the determination in step S4150 is YES, the process proceeds to step S4151, and if this determination is NO, the in-stop process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S5 (normal symbol process) in FIG.

  In step S4151, the CPU 101 sets a gaming state. Specifically, the CPU 101 sets the flag set to “ON” among the normal time reduction flag and the special time reduction flag stored in the RAM 103 to “OFF”. In the process of step S4151, the above-described normal time reduction flag or special time reduction flag is set to the specified fixed time (0...) After the stop process of step S414 is started (after the process of step S413 is completed). When 5 seconds) elapses, “OFF” is set. Thereby, when the next special symbol lottery is started, the gaming state is controlled in the non-short-time state (non-electric support state), and the set variation pattern table is the current table (HT4, HT2-1, HT2-2). , HT3) to HT1-1 or HT1-2. Then, the stop process ends, and the process proceeds to step S5 (normal symbol process) in FIG.

  Returning to FIG. 17, in step S415, the CPU 101 determines whether or not a customer waiting command and a gaming state notification command indicating the current gaming state have already been transmitted in the process of step 416 (described later). . Here, the customer waiting command is the time when the specified fixed time (0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the processing in step S414 was started (in other words, the special symbol variation display was terminated in the processing in step S413). This is a command that is sent when there is no special symbol lottery pending at the time 0.5 seconds have passed since the notification effect that informs the lottery result of the special symbol lottery has not been executed (hereinafter referred to as customer waiting). This is a command for notifying that the status has been reached. If the determination in step S415 is YES, the process proceeds to step S5 (normal symbol process) in FIG. 13, and if this determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S416.

  In step S <b> 416, the CPU 101 sets a customer waiting command and a gaming state notification command in the RAM 103. The customer waiting command and the gaming state notification command are transmitted to the effect control unit 400 by the output process of step S9 in FIG. 13, and a predetermined stop effect (for example, an effect of displaying a decorative symbol stop) is started based on the customer waiting command. Is done. When a predetermined time (for example, 90 seconds) elapses after the stop effect described above is started, the customer waiting effect is started. Here, the customer waiting effect is, for example, an effect in which a video related to the content (animation, story, etc.) that is the subject of the gaming machine 1 is displayed on the image display unit 6, for example, a predetermined effect ( For example, the image display unit 6 displays a part of the reach effect). Thereafter, the processing moves to step S5 (normal symbol processing) in FIG.

[Large winning prize processing]
26 to 29 are examples of detailed flowcharts of the special winning a prize opening process in step S6 of FIG. Hereinafter, the special winning opening process in step S6 of FIG. 13 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  First, in step S601, the CPU 101 of the main control unit 100 determines whether or not the state of the gaming machine 1 is a big hit game based on information stored in the RAM 103 (a big hit game flag). If the determination in step S601 is YES, the process proceeds to step S602. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S7 (electric tulip process) in FIG.

  In step S <b> 602, the CPU 101 determines based on the information stored in the RAM 103 whether or not the state of the gaming machine 1 is a jackpot game opening effect. If the determination in step S602 is YES, the process proceeds to step S603, and if this determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S609.

  In step S <b> 603, the CPU 101 determines whether or not a set opening time that defines the execution time of the opening effect has elapsed. If the determination in step S603 is YES, the process proceeds to step S604. If the determination is NO, the opening effect has not ended, and the process proceeds to step S7 (electric tulip process) in FIG.

  In step S <b> 604, the CPU 101 sets the total number of rounds Rmax of the big hit game, the operation patterns of the first big prize opening 23, the second big prize opening 51, and the V honey 52, and sets the setting information in the RAM 103. Specifically, the CPU 101 determines the first big prize opening 23, the second big prize opening 51, and the V hook 52 in the big hit game executed this time among the big hit games based on the big hits A to D described with reference to FIG. 6. Are set, and the setting information is set in the RAM 103. By the processing of step S604, the total number of rounds Rmax of the jackpot game, the interval time between rounds in the jackpot game, the set ending time that is the time for performing the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game, and the like are set. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S605.

  In step S <b> 605, the CPU 101 resets the number C of winning game balls to the first big prize opening 23 or the second big prize opening 51 stored in the RAM 103 to “0”. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S606.

  In step S <b> 606, the CPU 101 updates the round number R of the big hit game stored in the RAM 103 to a value obtained by adding one. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S607.

  In step S <b> 607, the CPU 101 starts opening control of the first big prize opening 23 or the second big prize opening 51. Specifically, when the value of R stored in the RAM 103 is not “8”, the first grand prize opening opening / closing unit 115 is controlled to start the opening control of the first big prize opening 23, while R When the value is “8” (that is, the V long round game or the V short round game), the second big prize opening / closing part 118 is controlled to start the opening control of the second big prize opening 51. By this process, the round of the big hit game (round game) is started and the opening operation (one opening operation) of the first big winning port 23 or the second big winning port 51 is started. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S608.

  In step S <b> 608, the CPU 101 sets a round start notification command for notifying a round start (round game start) in the RAM 103. This round start notification command is transmitted to the effect control unit 400 by the output process of step S9 in FIG. 13, and the round effect is started. The round start notification command includes information indicating the total number of rounds Rmax set in step S604 and information indicating the current number of rounds R updated by the process in step S606. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S613.

  In step S609, the CPU 101 determines based on the information stored in the RAM 103 whether or not the gaming machine 1 is in the big hit game interval. If the determination in step S609 is yes, the process proceeds to step S610. If the determination is no, the process proceeds to step S611.

  In step S610, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the set interval time during the jackpot game set in the process of step S604 has elapsed since the time when the first big winning opening 23 was closed at the end of the previous round during the jackpot game. Determine. If the determination in step S610 is YES, it is time to start the next round in the big hit game, so the process moves to step S605. If this determination is NO, the process moves to step S613.

  In step S <b> 611, the CPU 101 determines whether the state of the gaming machine 1 is executing the jackpot game ending effect based on the information stored in the RAM 103. If the determination in step S611 is YES, the process proceeds to step S623 in FIG. 25. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S612.

  In step S612, the CPU 101 executes a V region opening / closing process. Now, with reference to FIG. 28, the V region opening / closing process will be described. FIG. 28 is a detailed flowchart illustrating an example of the V region opening / closing process in step S612 of FIG.

  First, in step S6121 in FIG. 28, the CPU 101 determines the specified time (FIG. 7, FIG. 7) from when the second big prize opening 51 is opened in step S607 until the V area 53 set in the process in step S604 is opened. It is determined whether or not 3 seconds shown in FIG. 8 has elapsed. If the determination in step S6121 is YES, the process moves to step S6122, and if this determination is NO, the process moves to step S6125.

  In step S6122, the CPU 101 controls the V region opening / closing unit 120 to start the V region 53 opening control. By this process (in the case of a consecutive big hit), the game ball that has entered the second big winning opening 51 passes through the V region 53. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S6123.

  In step S6123, the CPU 101 starts the control for opening the V area 53 in step S6122, and then the specified time (8 seconds shown in FIGS. 7 and 8) until the V area 53 set in the process of step S604 is closed. Or 1 second). If the determination in step S6123 is YES, the process moves to step S6124. If the determination is NO, the process moves to step S6125.

  In step S 6124, the CPU 101 controls the V area opening / closing unit 120 to close the V area 53. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S6125.

  In step S6125, the CPU 101 determines whether or not a game ball has passed through the V area 53 in accordance with a detection signal from the V area switch 119. If the determination in step S6125 is YES, the process proceeds to step S6126. If the determination is NO, the V region opening / closing process ends, and the process proceeds to step S613 in FIG.

  In step S <b> 6126, the CPU 101 determines that the game ball has passed through the V region 53 and sets a V region passing command for notifying the effect control unit 400 that the game ball has passed through the V region 53 in the RAM 103. . Thereafter, the V region opening / closing process ends, and the process proceeds to step S613 in FIG. Note that the V region passing command set in step S6126 is transmitted to the effect control unit 400 by the output process in step S9 of FIG.

  Returning to FIG. 26, in step S613, the CPU 101 determines whether the first grand prize port 23 or the second big prize port 51 is based on the output signal from the first big prize port switch 114 or the second big prize port switch 117. It is determined whether or not a game ball has won. If the determination in step S613 is YES, the process moves to step S614. If the determination is NO, the process moves to step S615.

  In step S <b> 614, the CPU 101 determines that a winning of a game ball to the first big winning opening 23 or the second big winning opening 51 has been detected, and adds 1 to the number C of winning game balls stored in the RAM 103. Update to the specified value. The process of step S614 is executed each time a game ball wins the first grand prize opening 23 or the second big prize opening 51, so that the first big prize opening 23 or the second big prize opening is made during one round. The total number of game balls won in 51 (winning number C) is accumulated and stored in the RAM 103. In addition, the CPU 101 sets a winning command in the RAM 103 for notifying the effect control unit 400 that a game ball has won the first big winning opening 23 or the second big winning opening 51. When the winning command is transmitted to the effect control unit 400 by the output process of step S9 in FIG. 13, the effect control unit 400 causes the game ball to enter the first grand prize port 23 or the second big prize port during one round. Each time 51 is won, the number C of winnings (that is, the number of winnings in one round) is notified, and based on the notification information, the winning process instruction in step S125 of FIG. 35 is executed. Will be. In addition, the winning of the game ball to the first big winning opening 23 or the second big winning opening 51 is valid (that is, a normal winning) during the big winning opening effective period provided immediately after the round. The winning command described above is transmitted when a winning of a game ball is detected during the period considered to be valid. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S615.

  In step S615, the CPU 101 determines based on the information stored in the RAM 103 whether or not the state of the gaming machine 1 is executing the round effect of the big hit game. If the determination in step S615 is yes, the process proceeds to step S616. If the determination is no, the process proceeds to step S7 (electric tulip process) in FIG.

  In step S616, the CPU 101 determines whether or not a specified opening control time has elapsed since the opening control of the first big prize opening 23 or the second big prize opening 51 was started in the process of step S607. Specifically, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the opening control time of 29.5 seconds has elapsed for the first big prize opening 23 and the second big prize opening 51 in the case of continuous big hit. On the other hand, in the case of a single big hit, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the opening control time of 29.5 seconds has elapsed for the first big prize opening 23, and for the second big prize opening 51, it is 0. It is determined whether or not the opening control time for 1 second has elapsed. In the case of a big hit, the CPU 101 determines whether or not an opening control time of 0.1 seconds has passed for the first big prize opening 23 and the second big prize opening 51. If the determination in step S616 is YES, the process moves to step S618. If the determination is NO, the process moves to step S617.

  In step S617, the CPU 101 determines that the number C of game balls won in the current round is the upper limit game ball number Cmax that defines the timing at which the first big prize opening 23 or the second big prize opening 51 is closed (in this embodiment). It is determined whether or not “10”). If the determination in step S617 is YES, the process proceeds to step S618. If this determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S7 (electric tulip process) in FIG.

  In step S618, if the first big prize opening 23 is open, the CPU 101 controls the first big prize opening opening / closing unit 115 to perform the opening control of the first big prize opening 23 started in step S607. On the other hand, if the second big prize opening 51 is opened, the second big prize opening / closing part 118 is controlled to complete the opening control of the second big prize opening 51 started in step S607. . That is, the big prize opening opened in step S607 is closed and the current round is ended. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S619.

  In step S619, the CPU 101 sets a round end notification command for notifying the end of round (round game end) in the RAM 103. This round end notification command is transmitted to the effect control unit 400 by the output process of step S9 in FIG. 13, and the round effect is ended. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S620.

  In step S620, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the current round number R stored in the RAM 103 has reached the maximum round number Rmax of the big hit game set in the process of step S604. If the determination in step S620 is yes, the process proceeds to step S621 in FIG. 27. If the determination is no, the process proceeds to step S7 (electric tulip process) in FIG.

  In step S621 in FIG. 27, the CPU 101 resets the round number R stored in the RAM 103 to “0”. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S622.

  In step S622, the CPU 101 sets, in the RAM 103, an ending command that instructs the effect control unit 400 to execute the ending effect of the big hit game. The ending command set in this process is transmitted to the effect control unit 400 in step S9 (output process) in FIG. As the ending command, a command corresponding to the jackpot symbol and the gaming state controlled after the end of the jackpot game is transmitted, and the effect control unit 400, based on this ending command, after the end of the ending effect (the end of the jackpot game effect) Control the production of (after). Specifically, in the case of an ending command corresponding to a big hit symbol indicating a big hit (for example, big hit A or big hit D shown in FIG. 6) controlled in the probability changing gaming state after the big hit, the probability changing gaming state after the big hit game ends. An ending command indicating that the game is to be controlled is transmitted, and the effect control unit 400 executes the effect in the effect mode indicating the probability variation game state after the jackpot game effect is ended based on the ending command. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S623.

  In step S623, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the set ending time set in step S604 in FIG. 26 has elapsed since the ending command was set in the RAM 103 in step S622. If the determination in step S623 is YES, the process proceeds to step S624. If this determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S613 in FIG.

  In step S624, the CPU 101 ends the jackpot game being executed. Specifically, the CPU 101 sets the jackpot game flag stored in the RAM 103 to OFF and ends the jackpot game. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S625.

  In step S625, the CPU 101 executes a game state setting process. Here, with reference to FIG. 29, this gaming state setting process will be described. FIG. 29 is a detailed flowchart showing an example of the gaming state setting process in step S625 of FIG.

  First, in step S6251 of FIG. 29, the CPU 101 determines whether or not one or more game balls have passed through the V region 53 in step S6125 of FIG. 28 in the current big hit game. If the determination in step S6251 is YES, the process moves to step S6252, and if this determination is NO, the process moves to step S6256.

  In step S6252, the CPU 101 sets the high-accuracy flag stored in the RAM 103 to “ON”, and sets the value of S stored in the RAM 103 to “9999”. As described above, S indicates the remaining number of special symbol lotteries in which the game is controlled in a highly reliable state. Thereafter, processing proceeds to step S6253.

  In step S6253, the CPU 101 sets the normal time reduction flag stored in the RAM 103 to “ON”, and sets the value of J stored in the RAM 103 to “9999”. As described above, J indicates the remaining number of special symbol lotteries in which the game is controlled in the short-time state (electric support state). Then, the game state setting process ends, and the process proceeds to step S7 (electric tulip process) in FIG.

  In step S6254, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the game ended in step S624 in FIG. 27 is a big hit game based on a continuous big hit (big hit A or big hit D). That is, it is determined whether the game ball has not passed through the V area 53 in the continuous big hit or whether the game ball has not passed through the V area 53 in the big hit that is not the continuous big hit. If the determination in step S6254 is YES, the process moves to step S6255, and if this determination is NO, the process moves to step S6256.

  In step S6255, the CPU 101 sets the normal time reduction flag stored in the RAM 103 to “ON”, and sets the value of J stored in the RAM 103 to “100”. Then, the game state setting process ends, and the process proceeds to step S7 (electric tulip process) in FIG.

  In step S6256, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the game ended in step S624 in FIG. 27 is a big hit game based on a sudden big hit (big hit C). If the determination in step S6256 is YES, the process moves to step S6257, and if this determination is NO, the process moves to step S6255.

  In step S6257, the CPU 101 sets the special time reduction flag stored in the RAM 103 to “ON”, and sets the value of J stored in the RAM 103 to “30”. Then, the game state setting process ends, and the process proceeds to step S7 (electric tulip process) in FIG.

  As described above, when the game ball passes the V region 53, the game state after the big hit is set to the probabilistic gaming state until the next special symbol lottery is won (more accurately, until the special symbol lottery is executed 9999 times). (Steps S6252 and S6253). On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the V region 53, and if it is a consecutive big hit or single hit big hit, the gaming state after the big hit is controlled in the short-time gaming state up to the 100th rotation (step S6255). If it is a big hit at the time of a collision, the gaming state after the big hit is controlled in the short time gaming state up to the 30th rotation (step S6257). In this embodiment, when the vehicle does not pass through the V region 53, the number of time reductions (the value of J) is set to be the same for the continuous big hit and the single big hit, but in the case of the continuous big hit, It is good also as what sets many times shorter than a case. This is preferable for the following reasons. That is, in the continuous big hit, as described above, since the V long round game in which the game ball can pass through the V region 53 is executed, the game is usually controlled in the probability variation game state after the big hit. Therefore, if an advantageous gaming state (probability changing gaming state) cannot be acquired because the game ball does not pass through the V region 53, it is impossible to receive the benefits that should have been originally acquired. Therefore, in such a case, by executing the V short round game, it is possible to increase the number of time reductions more than the single big hit where the game is not controlled in the probability variation gaming state after the big hit. Remedies can be taken.

  Above, description of the process of the main control part 100 demonstrated using FIGS. 10-29 is complete | finished.

[Timer interrupt processing by production control unit]
30, 31, and 34 to 38 are flowcharts illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing performed by the effect control unit 400. Below, with reference to FIGS. 30-39, the timer interruption process performed in the production | presentation control part 400 is demonstrated. The production control unit 400 performs a series of processes shown in FIGS. 30, 31, and 34 to 38 for a certain period of time (for example, 4 milliseconds) during a normal operation except for special cases such as when the power is turned on or when the power is turned off. ) Repeat every time. Note that the processing performed by the effect control unit 400 is executed based on a program stored in the ROM 402.

  In step S10 of FIG. 30, the CPU 401 of the effect control unit 400 sets an effect (hereinafter referred to as an RTC effect) according to the date and time (time) measured by the RTC 404, and the set RTC effect is the image sound control unit 500 or the like. The RTC effect control process for setting various commands for instructing execution to the RAM 403 is executed. The RTC effect control process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

  Next, in step S11, the CPU 401 receives various commands output by the output process of step S9 in FIG. 13 from the main control unit 100, sets the production content according to the received command, and sets the production content. A command reception process for setting various commands in the RAM 403 to instruct the image sound control unit 500 or the like to execute the effect is executed. The command reception process will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35.

  Next, in step S12, the CPU 401 executes an output process for outputting various commands set in the RAM 403 to the image sound control unit 500 and the like in the processes in steps S10 and S11. Through this process, the various effects determined to be executed in the processes of step S10 and step S11 are executed by the image display unit 6, the speaker 35, the panel lamp 8, and the like by the execution control of the image sound control unit 500 and the like. Become.

  Note that each time the timer interrupt process described above is executed, the CPU 401 performs a random number update process for updating various effect random numbers used for the effect. In this random number update process, a loop counter is typically used as in the random number update process in step S1 of FIG. 13, and the count value (updated random number value) is set to the maximum value (for example, 99). After reaching, it returns to 0 again (that is, it circulates). Also, in this random number update process, each effect random number counter updates the initial value (the value that is the starting point of circulation) at random once it circulates. As a result, the counter value (count value) can be prevented from synchronizing between these effect random numbers.

[RTC effect control processing]
FIG. 31 is an example of a detailed flowchart of the RTC effect control process in step S10 of FIG. Hereinafter, the RTC effect control process in step S10 of FIG. 30 will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, three types of effects of the first RTC effect, the second RTC effect, and the replacement effect are executed as the RTC effects corresponding to the date and time (time) measured by the RTC 404. Here, the first RTC effect is a predetermined first set time (for example, every hour from 10:00 to 22:00 on each day of the week; that is, 10:00, 11:00, 12:00, ... 22). : 00), and the latest theatrical performance described later is performed for a specified time. The second RTC effect is a predetermined second set time (for example, every hour from 10:30 to 22:30 on each day of the week; that is, 10:30, 11:30, 12:30, ..., 22:30). ) And a game effect to be described later is an effect executed for a specified time. The replacement effect is a predetermined third set time (the effect update timing defined for each day of the week shown in (2) of FIG. 32 described later; that is, Monday to Friday at 20:00, Saturday and Sunday at 11:00. , 14:00, 17:00, 20:00), and is an effect indicating that a part of the theater effect described later has been updated to the latest one. The third set time is included in the first set time, but when the third set time is reached, the replacement effect is preferentially executed, and in this case, the first RTC effect is not executed. Further, as described above, in the plurality of gaming machines 1 installed on one island in the pachinko hall, the time information measured by each RTC 404 is synchronized. For this reason, by setting the first set time, the second set time, and the third set time to be the same among the plurality of gaming machines 1, the RTC effects can be simultaneously started in all the gaming machines 1. Can do.

  First, in step S101, the CPU 401 of the effect control unit 400 determines whether it is the start timing of the replacement effect (that is, the time indicated by the RTC 404 is the third set time). If the determination in step S101 is YES, the process proceeds to step S102, and if this determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S104.

  In step S102, the CPU 401 performs a phase update process, and then the process proceeds to step S103. Here, the phase update process will be described with reference to FIG.

[Phase update process]
First, with reference to (1) of FIG. 32, a theater effect and its category in the present embodiment will be described. Although details will become clear from the following description, in this embodiment, theater effects of four categories (categories A to D) are executed in various scenes as one of the game effects performed as the game progresses. Is done. In addition, a plurality of theatrical effects are prepared as theatrical effects for each category. Specifically, theatrical effects for category A are 120, theatrical effects for category B are 144, theatrical effects for category C are 24, and category D Twenty-four theater effects are prepared, and all these theater effects are stored in the ROM 502. In addition, these theater productions are productions each having a production scale (length) of 60 seconds in total length. Also, in the following, as in “A-3”, alphabets and numbers are connected with hyphens, and the alphabets indicate categories, and the numbers are the number of theatrical effects in the theater effects. It shall be shown. Therefore, for example, “A-3” indicates “the third theater effect in category A”.

  As described above, the ROM 502 stores all the theater effects, but the theater effects that can actually be used (that is, executable) as the game effects are the execution timing of the replacement effects (that is, the third effect). The data is updated one by one at the timing when the set time arrives (details will be described later, replacement update or additional update). Specifically, in the present embodiment, in order to specify a play performance that can be executed, a phase represented by a number is defined for each category, and the number of phases has been updated to the latest (executable). It shows the number of productions in the category of the theater production. In other words, when the phase of category A is 7, it means that the play production of “A-7” can be executed most recently. In this embodiment, phase 0 indicates an initial state in which no theater effects can be executed, but phase 0 is the same as phase 1 and the first effect in each category. May be executable. In the present embodiment, an executable theater effect changes as the phases are added and updated one by one at the timing defined for each category. This will be specifically described below.

  First, with reference to (2) of FIG. 32, the phase update timing for each category (that is, the update timing of the drama production) will be described. In the present embodiment, the phase of each category is updated at the timing when the replacement effect is executed (that is, when the third set time arrives). Specifically, as shown in (2) of FIG. 32, in the replacement effect, one week is Monday to Friday at 20:00, Saturday and Sunday at 11:00, 14:00, 17:00, 20 The phase of category A is 10:00 on Tuesday, 20:00 on Thursday, 11:00 on Saturday, 17:00 on Saturday, and 14:00 on Sunday. The category B phase is 10:00 on Monday, 20:00 on Wednesday, 20:00 on Friday, 14:00 on Saturday, 11:00 on Sunday, and 17 on Sunday. 0: 1 is added and updated, category C phase is updated 1 every Saturday at 20:00, and category D phase is updated 1 at 20:00 on Sunday of the week The Thus, in this embodiment, since the date and time when the phase is updated differs depending on the category, the theater production category updated depending on the date and time is different. After one week, the category A phase is updated by 5 additions, the category B phase is updated by 6 additions, and the categories C and D phases are updated by 1 addition. Therefore, after 24 weeks, the category A phase is updated to 5 × 24 = 120, the category B phase is updated to 6 × 24 = 144, and the categories C and D phases are updated to 1 × 24 = 24. As a result, the last theatrical performances “A-120”, “B-144”, “C-24”, and “D-24” in each category can be executed.

  Next, an example of phase update will be described with reference to (3) of FIG. Now, at 09:00 on Monday morning, the gaming machine 1 is installed in the hall and starts operation. At 12:00 on Sunday the seventh day after operation, the category A phase is 4, and the category B phase is 5, the phase of category C is 1, and the phase of category D is 0. At this time, when it becomes 14:00 on Sunday of the seventh day after the operation, the phase of category A is updated (see (2) in FIG. 32), so the phase of category A is updated from 4 to 5. Similarly, the category B phase is updated from 5 to 6 at 17:00 on the seventh Sunday after operation, and the category D phase is 0 at 20:00 on the seventh Sunday after operation. From 1 to 20:00 on Monday, the eighth day after operation, the category B phase is updated from 6 to 7, and after 20:00 on the ninth day after operation, the category A phase Is updated from 5 to 6. Then, the CPU 401 stores the phase of each category updated in this manner in the RAM 403, and executes a production instruction to the image sound control unit 500 based on the phase, thereby performing the play in each category stored in the ROM 502. It is specified which of the effects can be executed. Note that when the hall operation is terminated and the supply of power to the gaming machine 1 is interrupted, the stored information in the RAM 403 is lost, but when the hall business is started the next day, the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is lost. When the supply is started, the phase of each category is reset in the RAM 403 based on the time indicated by the RTC 404 when the power supply is resumed. Specifically, for example, when power supply is resumed at 9:00 on Monday of the eighth day after operation, based on the time, the CPU 401 determines that the seventh day after operation, which is the latest phase update timing. The phase state of Sunday at 20:00 (that is, as shown in FIG. 32 (3), the category A phase is 5, the category B phase is 6, the category C and D phases are 1) is set in the RAM 403. . In addition, the current phase information may be stored in the memory in the RTC 404 or the non-volatile RAM 504 so that the current phase information is not lost even when the power is turned off.

  Next, with reference to (4) and (5) of FIG. 32, the update of the theater effect that can be executed based on the phase update will be described. In the present embodiment, there are two theater effects updates: a replacement update in which the theater effects executable by the phase update are replaced and an additional update in which the theater effects executable by the phase update are added. In the following, an effect set as a play effect that can be executed by replacement update is referred to as a replacement update effect, and an effect set as a play effect that can be executed by additional update is referred to as an additional update effect. .

  First, the replacement update of the theater production will be described with reference to (4) of FIG. In the present embodiment, only the theater effects of category A are replaced and updated and set as replacement update effects. Specifically, as the renewal update effect, a theater effect with an upper limit of five is set in the order of the newly-executable theater effect. For example, when the phase of category A is updated to 4, four theater effects “A-4”, “A-3”, “A-2”, and “A-1” are set as replacement update effects. When the phase of A is updated to 5, five theater effects “A-5”, “A-4”, “A-3”, “A-2”, and “A-1” are set as replacement update effects. When the phase of category A is updated to 6, the five theater productions “A-6”, “A-5”, “A-4”, “A-3”, and “A-2” are replaced. Thereafter, five theater effects are set as replacement effects in the order of the theater effects that are newly executable (see the shaded area in (4) of FIG. 32). Note that the phase is updated even after 24 weeks have passed since operation, but if the category A phase is updated beyond 120, the number of remainders when the phase is divided by 120 is set as the new phase. (However, if the remainder is 0, the phase is regarded as 120), the phase is loop-updated between 1 and 120. Therefore, for example, when the phase is updated to 122, it is considered that the phase is 2, so that “A-2” becomes the latest playable performance, so that the replacement update effect is newly executed. Five theater effects of “A-2”, “A-1”, “A-120”, “A-119”, and “A-118” are set in the order of the enabled theater effects.

  Next, with reference to (5) of FIG. 32, the additional update of the theater production will be described. In this embodiment, the theater effects of all categories A to D are additionally updated and set as additional update effects. Specifically, as the additional update effect, all the theater effects that have been executed so far are set. For example, if the phase of category A is updated to 6, “A-6” becomes the latest theater performance that can be executed, so “A-1” to “A-6” updated so far. When all the theater performances of No. are set as additional update effects and the phase is updated to 7, “A-7” is additionally set as an additional update effect (the hatched portion in (5) of FIG. 32). reference). In addition, since the theater effect of categories B to D is similarly updated and set in accordance with the update of the phase, for example, 20: Tuesday of the ninth day after operation shown in (3) of FIG. In 00, the category A phase is updated to 6, the category B phase is 7, the category C phase is 1, and the category D phase is 1 (set). Theater performances of “1” to “A-6”, “B-1” to “B-7”, “C-1”, and “D-1” are set. Each phase is updated even after 24 weeks have passed since the operation, but even if the category A phase is updated beyond 120, the additional update effect does not change any more. Even if the phases of C, D and D are updated beyond 144, 24, 24, respectively, the additional update effect is not changed any more, and all the theater effects in all categories are set as the additional update effect. Will be.

  As described above, the CPU 401 performs the phase update process to update the phase of each category in the RAM 403, and executes the effect instruction to the image sound control unit 500 based on the phase, thereby performing the play stored in the ROM 502. Among the effects, a maximum of five category A theater effects that can be executed as replacement update effects and a category A to D theater effects that can be executed as additional update effects are specified. Although the details will be described later, the theater effect that can be executed as the replacement update effect specified in this way is used as a reach effect (selected theater reach effect or partial theater reach effect) under specific conditions, and as an additional update effect. The executable theater effect that can be executed is used as a selection effect that can be selected by a player to be described later. Therefore, the reach effect is updated according to the time indicated by the RTC 404, and the selection effect that can be selected by the player is also updated according to the time indicated by the RTC 404.

  Note that the above-described phase update is targeted by determining whether the first set time, the second set time, and the third set time have been reached based on the time information measured by the RTC 404 of the gaming machine 1. The category phase was updated. However, this is not limited to an example in which the phase is updated based on the time information. For example, the time elapsed since the gaming machine was turned on with the opening of the hall (that is, the current day) It is also possible to update the phase of the target category according to the elapsed time after operation) and execute each RTC effect. In this case, by simultaneously turning on the power of a plurality of gaming machines 1 installed on one island shown in FIG. 9, it becomes possible to synchronize the time elapsed since the power was turned on. Therefore, it becomes possible to start RTC effects all at once on one island. In this case, since the timing for turning on the power can be changed depending on the hall, the time during which the RTC effect is executed can be changed for each hall.

  Returning to FIG. 31, in step S103, the CPU 401 instructs the image sound control unit 500 or the like to start a replacement effect. Thereafter, the RTC effect control process ends, and the process proceeds to step S11 in FIG.

  In step S104, the CPU 401 determines whether it is the start timing of the first RTC effect (that is, the time indicated by the RTC 404 is the first set time). If the determination in step S104 is yes, the process proceeds to step S105. If the determination is no, the process proceeds to step S106.

  In step S105, the CPU 401 instructs the image sound control unit 500 or the like to start the first RTC effect. Thereafter, the RTC effect control process ends, and the process proceeds to step S11 in FIG.

  In step S106, the CPU 401 of the effect control unit 400 determines whether it is the start timing of the second RTC effect (that is, the time indicated by the RTC 404 is the second set time). If the determination in step S106 is YES, the process proceeds to step S107. If this determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S109.

  In step S <b> 107, the CPU 401 determines whether or not it is a gaming state that can be rendered. Here, with reference to FIG. 33, the gaming state that can be produced will be described. As shown in FIG. 33, in this embodiment, three types of effects, a replacement effect, a first RTC effect, and a second RTC effect, are executed as the RTC effect. The replacement effect and the first RTC effect are games at the start timing of the RTC effect. While it is possible to execute regardless of the state, it is determined whether the second RTC effect can be executed according to the gaming state at the RTC effect start timing (that is, at the second set time). Specifically, at the start timing (second set time) of the second RTC effect, when the gaming state is any one of the short-time gaming state, the probability variation gaming state, and the big hit gaming state, the gaming state is not executable. If it is determined that there is (that is, the second RTC effect is not executed), and the gaming state is the normal gaming state or the waiting state for the customer in the normal gaming state at the start timing (second set time) of the second RTC effect, it is executed. It is determined that the gaming state is possible (that is, the second RTC effect is executed). If the determination in step S107 is YES, the process proceeds to step S108. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S11 in FIG.

  In step S108, the CPU 401 instructs the image sound control unit 500 or the like to start the second RTC effect. Thereafter, the RTC effect control process ends, and the process proceeds to step S11 in FIG.

  In step S109, the CPU 401 determines whether it is the end timing of the RTC effect (first RTC effect, second RTC effect, or replacement effect). Specifically, the CPU 401 determines whether two minutes have elapsed from the start time of these effects as the end timing of the first RTC effect and the replacement effect, and determines the second RTC effect as the end timing of the second RTC effect. It is determined whether or not two minutes have elapsed from the start time of the first time or whether or not a notification effect (fluctuation effect) for notifying a big hit is executed during the execution of the second RTC effect. That is, the first RTC effect and the replacement effect are determined to be the end timing when two minutes have elapsed from the start time, and the second RTC effect is a variation in which two minutes have elapsed from the start time or a big hit is notified after it is started. When the effect is executed, it is determined that it is the end timing. If the determination in step S109 is YES, the process proceeds to step S110. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S11 in FIG.

  In step S110, the CPU 401 instructs the image sound control unit 500 and the like to end the RTC effect being executed. Thereafter, the RTC effect control process ends, and the process proceeds to step S11 in FIG.

  Note that the instruction to the image sound control unit 500 or the like in the above-described steps S103, S105, S108, and S110 is performed by setting a command in the RAM 403. Further, when the CPU 401 gives an RTC effect execution instruction in steps S103, S105, and 108, the RTC effect instruction in-progress flag is set to ON and stored in the RAM 403, and when the RTC effect end instruction is given in step S110, the RTC effect is given. Set the production instruction flag. Here, the flag indicating that the RTC effect is instructed is a flag indicating that the RTC effect is being instructed by being set to ON. The RTC effect execution process executed by the image sound control unit 500 that has received an instruction from the effect control unit 400 will be described later with reference to FIG. 40. As shown in FIG. However, there is a case where a wipe display (details will be described later, display in the wipe area 6w shown in (1A) of FIG. 62) may be displayed, and the second RTC effect is translucent under a specific condition. It may be displayed.

[Command reception processing]
34 and 35 are examples of detailed flowcharts of the command reception process in step S11 of FIG. Hereinafter, the command reception process in step S11 of FIG. 30 will be described with reference to FIG. 34 and FIG.

  First, in step S111, the CPU 401 of the effect control unit 400 determines whether or not a hold increase command (first hold number increase command or second hold number increase command) is received from the main control unit 100 (FIG. 16). (See steps S206 and S212). If the determination in step S111 is YES, the process proceeds to step S112. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S114.

  In step S112, the CPU 401 instructs the image sound control unit 500 in response to the hold increase command received in the process of step S111, and displays a hold image additional display process indicating the hold of the special symbol lottery on the image display unit 6. Then, the hold image display process for changing the hold image to the prefetch display mode is performed. The displayed on-hold images are sequentially deleted when the notification effect is started based on the processing in step S115 described later. Also, the instruction to the image sound control unit 500 is performed by setting a command in the RAM 403. In addition, when the CPU 401 receives the first hold number increase command, the RAM 403 causes the RAM 403 to store one piece of data (hold data) indicating the hold of the first special symbol lottery in time series, while the second hold number When the increase command is received, the RAM 403 stores one piece of data (holding data) indicating the holding of the second special symbol lottery in time series order. At that time, the CPU 401 extracts pre-determination information included in the hold increase command, includes it in the above-described hold data, and stores it in the RAM 403. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S113, the CPU 401 performs a prefetch notice effect setting process. Specifically, the CPU 401 stores the special symbol lottery holding number (the number of holding data) stored in the RAM 403 more than 2 including the holding added in step S112, and stores it in the RAM 403 most recently. Whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice effect is determined by lottery or the like based on the prior determination information (that is, included in the latest pending data). For example, the CPU 401 determines that the prior determination information indicates “big hit”, “losing” and “reach effect” (reach effect), or “losing” and “reach effect”. In each of the cases indicating “None” (no reach reach), a prefetch random number is acquired, and when the prefetch random number matches a predetermined prefetch winning value, it is determined to perform the prefetch notice effect. It should be noted that different numbers may be set for the pre-reading winning values depending on whether the pre-determination information is “big hit”, “losing with reach”, or “losing without reach”. Specifically, by setting the number of prefetch winning values in the case of “big hit” larger than the number of prefetching winning values in the case of “losing with reach”, a prefetching notice effect is easily performed in the case of “big hit”. It may be a thing. If it is determined to execute the pre-reading notice effect, the CPU 401 performs a pre-reading notice to be executed by lottery or the like from a number of pre-reading notice effect patterns that satisfy the conditions of the prior determination information (such as the condition of whether or not a big hit) Set the contents of the production. That is, as the pre-reading notice effect, what kind of notice effect is performed in each notification effect is set. Note that the pre-reading notice effect is a notice effect that suggests the possibility of a big hit over a plurality of notification effects, for example. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S114.

  In step S114, the CPU 401 determines whether or not the notification effect start command and the gaming state notification command set in step S409 of FIG. 17 have been received. If the determination in step S114 is YES, the process proceeds to step S115, and if this determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S116.

  In step S115, the CPU 401 sets the effect content of the notification effect by the image display unit 6 or the like according to the notification effect start command received in the process of step S114, and executes the notification effect of the set content. A notification effect setting process for instructing and starting 500 or the like is performed. Here, the notification effect (variation effect) is an effect that is executed in the image display unit 6 or the like according to the variation display of the special symbol and suggests the result of the special symbol lottery. For example, the decorative symbol is variably displayed. This is an effect in which the result of the special symbol lottery is notified when the decorative symbol that is variably displayed is stopped and displayed. Note that an instruction to the image sound control unit 500 or the like is performed by setting a command in the RAM 403. This notification effect setting process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S116.

  In step S116, the CPU 401 determines whether or not the notification effect stop command set in step S412 in FIG. 17 has been received. If the determination in step S116 is YES, the process proceeds to step S117, and if this determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S120 in FIG.

  In step S117, the CPU 401 instructs the image sound control unit 500 or the like to end the notification effect started to be executed in the process of step S115, and finally stops all the decorative symbols that have been variably displayed (confirmed). Stop the display) and inform the effect of the special symbol lottery. Note that an instruction to the image sound control unit 500 or the like is performed by setting a command in the RAM 403. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S120 in FIG.

  In step S120 in FIG. 35, the CPU 401 determines whether or not the opening command set in the stopping process in step S414 in FIG. 17 has been received. If the determination in step S120 is yes, the process proceeds to step S121. If the determination is no, the process proceeds to step S122.

  In step S121, the CPU 401 issues an opening effect instruction. Specifically, the CPU 401 instructs the image sound control unit 500 or the like to start the opening effect of the big hit game effect. Note that an instruction to the image sound control unit 500 or the like is performed by setting a command in the RAM 403. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S122. Also, the opening effect process executed by the image sound control unit 500 that has received an instruction from the effect control unit 400 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S122, the CPU 401 determines whether or not the round start notification command set in the process of step S608 in FIG. 26 has been received. If the determination in step S122 is YES, the process proceeds to step S123, and if this determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S124.

  In step S123, the CPU 401 issues a round effect start instruction. Specifically, the CPU 401 instructs the image sound control unit 500 to start a round effect process of a big hit game effect. Note that an instruction to the image sound control unit 500 or the like is performed by setting a command in the RAM 403. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S124. Further, the round effect process executed by the image sound control unit 500 that has received an instruction from the effect control unit 400 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S124, the CPU 401 determines whether or not the winning command set by the processing in step S614 in FIG. 26 and outputted in the output processing in step S9 in FIG. 13 has been received. If the determination in step S124 is YES, the process proceeds to step S125, and if this determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S126.

  In step S125, the CPU 401 issues a winning process instruction. Specifically, the CPU 401 instructs the image sound control unit 500 to start a winning process. Note that an instruction to the image sound control unit 500 or the like is performed by setting a command in the RAM 403. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S126. The winning process executed by the image sound control unit 500 that has received an instruction from the effect control unit 400 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S126, the CPU 401 determines whether or not the round end notification command set in the process of step S619 in FIG. 26 has been received. If the determination in step S126 is YES, the process proceeds to step S127, and if this determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S128.

  In step S127, the CPU 401 instructs the image sound control unit 500 or the like to end the round effect of the big hit game effect. Note that an instruction to the image sound control unit 500 or the like is performed by setting a command in the RAM 403. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S128.

  In step S128, the CPU 401 determines whether or not the ending command set in the process of step S622 in FIG. 27 has been received. If the determination in step S128 is YES, the process proceeds to step S129, and if this determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S130.

  In step S129, the CPU 401 issues an ending effect instruction. Specifically, the CPU 401 instructs the image sound control unit 500 to start the ending effect of the big hit game effect. Note that an instruction to the image sound control unit 500 or the like is performed by setting a command in the RAM 403. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S130. Further, the ending effect process executed by the image sound control unit 500 that has received an instruction from the effect control unit 400 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S130, the CPU 401 determines whether or not the customer waiting command and the gaming state notification command set in the process of step S416 in FIG. 17 have been received. If the determination in step S130 is yes, the process proceeds to step S131. If this determination is no, the command reception process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S12 in FIG.

  In step S131, the CPU 401 instructs the image sound control unit 500 and the like based on the customer waiting command and the gaming state notification command received in step S130 to start the customer waiting process. Note that an instruction to the image sound control unit 500 or the like is performed by setting a command in the RAM 403. Then, the command reception process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S12 in FIG. Note that the customer waiting process is a process that is started when a so-called customer waiting state is entered, and the CPU 501 of the image sound control unit 500 that is instructed to start the customer waiting process issues, for example, a notification effect start instruction. This customer waiting process is executed until it is received, and the customer waiting process is terminated by receiving a notification production start instruction. However, if the CPU 501 is notified of information indicating that the game ball has passed through the gate 25 or information indicating that the game ball has been won at the normal winning opening, the CPU 501 continues without waiting for the customer. . The customer waiting process executed by the image sound control unit 500 that has received an instruction from the effect control unit 400 will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Notification effect setting processing]
Next, the notification effect setting process by the effect control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a detailed flowchart showing an example of the notification effect setting process in step S115 of FIG.

  First, in step S801, the CPU 401 of the effect control unit 400 executes an effect state setting process for setting an effect state in the notification effect to be executed this time. Here, the effect state specifies what state the current state (for example, the game state) in which the notification effect is being executed, and is referred to when executing an unlinked effect described later. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S802. Details of the effect state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 37, and details of the unlinked effect will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S802, the CPU 401 determines an effect pattern to be executed in the current notification effect based on the setting information included in the notification effect start command received in step S114 of FIG. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 19 to 24, when the variation pattern (special symbol variation time) indicated by the setting information is “90.05 seconds”, the CPU 401 executes the first SPSP reach and hits the jackpot. An effect pattern (per 1st SPSP) to be notified is determined, and when the variation pattern indicated by the setting information is “90.04 seconds”, an effect pattern (per 2nd SPSP) to be executed by executing up to the second SPSP reach is determined. When the variation pattern indicated by the setting information is “90.03 seconds”, the effect pattern (per third SPSP) that is executed up to the third SPSP reach is determined and the variation pattern indicated by the setting information is “90.02”. In the case of “second”, an effect pattern (per 4th SPSP) is determined by executing up to the fourth SPSP reach, and the variation pattern indicated by the setting information is In the case of “90.01 seconds”, an effect pattern (per pseudo-3) is determined after a pseudo-continuous effect of three times of pseudo-continuations, and the variation pattern indicated by the setting information is “40.02 seconds” After determining the effect pattern (per SP) that is executed up to the SP reach, and the variation pattern indicated by the setting information is “40.01 seconds”, after performing the pseudo-continuous effect twice. An effect pattern (pseudo 2) to be notified of the big hit is determined, and when the variation pattern indicated by the setting information is “15.02 seconds”, the effect pattern (pseudo When the variation pattern indicated by the setting information is “15.01 seconds”, the effect pattern (per reach) is determined by executing the reach until reaching the big hit, and the variation pattern indicated by the setting information is In the case of “68.00 seconds”, “60.00 seconds”, “48.00 seconds”, “36.00 seconds”, and “12.00 seconds”, 68 seconds, 60 seconds, 48 seconds, and 36 seconds, respectively. When the variation pattern of the 12-second scale is repeatedly displayed to determine the effect pattern (per first scale) to notify the big hit, and the variation pattern indicated by the setting information is “4.50 seconds”, reach is established. Then, an effect pattern (short hit) to be immediately notified is determined. In addition, when the variation pattern indicated by the setting information is “90.10 seconds”, the CPU 401 determines an effect pattern (first SPSP loss) that is executed up to the first SPSP reach and notifies the loss, and the variation pattern indicated by the setting information is “ In the case of “90.09 seconds”, the effect pattern (second SPSP loss) is determined by executing up to the second SPSP reach, and when the variation pattern indicated by the setting information is “90.08 seconds”, the third SPSP reach is determined. Until the fourth SPSP reach is executed when the variation pattern indicated by the setting information is “90.07 seconds” (fourth SPSP). If the variation pattern indicated by the setting information is “90.06 seconds”, the pseudo-continuous performance is 3 times. After determining the effect pattern (squad 3 loss) to be notified of the loss, if the variation pattern indicated by the setting information is “40.04 seconds”, execute the effect pattern (SP loss) to execute the SP reach and notify the loss. When the variation pattern indicated by the setting information is “40.03 seconds”, an effect pattern (pseudo 2 loss) to be notified of the loss is determined after the pseudo-continuous effect of the number of times of pseudo-continuous 2 times, and the setting information indicates When the variation pattern is “15.04 seconds”, an effect pattern (pseudo 1 loss) is determined after the pseudo-continuous effect of the number of times of pseudo-continuations is passed, and the variation pattern indicated by the setting information is “15.03 seconds. In the case of "", the effect pattern (reach loss) that is executed until reaching reach is determined, and the variation pattern indicated by the setting information is "13.50 seconds", "10.00 seconds", "9. 0 seconds "," 8.00 seconds "," 3.00 seconds "," 2.00 seconds "," 1.50 seconds ", or" 0.50 seconds ", the reach is not executed and the loss is notified. The effect pattern to be performed (immediate loss, first rotation loss, short loss, or extremely short loss) is determined. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S803.

  In step S802, the CPU 401 determines a selected theater reach effect (see FIGS. 67 and 68), which will be described later, as the fourth SPSP reach effect in the normal game state, and in the short-time game state after the single big hit, As the 4SPSP reach effect, a full special effect (see FIGS. 69 and 70) described later can be determined. Further, the CPU 401 determines a partial theater reach effect (see FIGS. 67 and 68), which will be described later, as an SP reach effect in the normal game state, and will be described later as an SP reach effect in the short-time game state after a single big hit. A short special effect (see FIGS. 69 and 70) can be determined. In addition, in the above, as the SP reach production, the types of production patterns of multiple types are not described as in the first SPSP reach production to the fourth SPSP reach production, but the type of production pattern of the SP reach production based on the variation pattern. Even if it is determined, one SP reach effect may be determined from a plurality of types of SP reach effects by lottery or the like using effect random numbers by the effect control unit 400.

  In step S803, the CPU 401 determines the detailed content (scenario) of the effect based on the effect pattern determined in step S802. Specifically, the CPU 401 determines an effect (reach effect or immediate lose effect) to be finally executed based on the effect pattern determined in step S802. At that time, when the decorative design is stopped and displayed. The type of symbol (so-called outcome) is determined based on production random numbers, etc., and what kind of notice production is configured as a scenario until the final production is executed based on production random numbers, etc. To decide. Note that the notice effect is a variety of effects that are executed before or during the effect determined based on the effect pattern, and the reach in which the decorative symbol is in the reach state. Examples include an eye formation effect and a cut-in effect for notifying reliability during a reach effect. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S804. In the present embodiment, even if the same variation pattern (for example, variation pattern “40.03 seconds”; pseudo 2 loss shown in FIG. 19) is determined for the pseudo-continuous production, it is designated by the variation pattern in the production content determination process. There may be a case where an effect of a pseudo-continuous number different from the type of effect pattern made is determined. Details of the effect content determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S804, the CPU 401 instructs the image sound control unit 500 and the like to execute a notification effect of the effect state set in step S801 and the effect content determined in step S803. Note that an instruction to the image sound control unit 500 or the like is performed by setting a command in the RAM 403. Thereafter, the notification effect setting process ends, and the process proceeds to step S116 in FIG. The CPU 501 of the image sound control unit 500 that has received the notification effect instruction from the effect control unit 400 schedules the execution timing, execution time, etc. of the configured notice effect based on the specified effect state and effect contents. And performing an effect execution process for executing each notice effect according to the schedule. The effect execution process by the image sound control unit 500 will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Production state setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 37, an effect state setting process by the effect control unit 400 will be described. FIG. 37 is a detailed flowchart showing an example of the effect state setting process in step S801 of FIG.

  First, in step S8011, the CPU 401 of the effect control unit 400 determines whether or not the current notification effect is the notification effect in the first rotation after the short-time gaming state after the sudden hit is started. It should be noted that the CPU 401 can determine whether or not the notification effect is the first rotation by counting up the number of fluctuations since the start of the short-time gaming state after the big hit, but in FIG. As shown, according to HT3 referred to in the short-time game state after the big hit, the fluctuation pattern at the first rotation is different from the fluctuation patterns at the other rotation speeds in both the big hit and the loss. It is good also as what judges whether it is the information effect of the 1st rotation based on a pattern. If the determination in step S8011 is YES, the process proceeds to step S8012, and if this determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S8013.

  In step S8012, the CPU 401 sets, as the effect state stored in the RAM 403, effect state 1 indicating that the state is the first rotation in the short-time gaming state after the big hit. It should be noted that, by setting the effect state 1, the opportunity for the player to set one of the replacement update effects as the post-impact dedicated effect in the first rotation after the short-time game state after the big hit is started. (Time) is provided. Then, the effect state setting process ends, and the process proceeds to step S802 in FIG.

  In step S <b> 8013, the CPU 401 of the effect control unit 400 determines whether or not the current notification effect is the notification effect in the second to thirty rotations after the short-time gaming state after the sudden hit is started. Specifically, the CPU 401 determines whether or not the notification effect is in the 2nd to 30th rotations based on the number of fluctuations counted up after the short-time gaming state after the collision big hit is started. If the determination in step S8013 is YES, the process moves to step S8014. If the determination is NO, the process moves to step S8015.

  In step S <b> 8014, the CPU 401 sets the performance state 2 indicating the state of the 2nd to 30th rotations in the short-time gaming state after the big hit, as the performance state stored in the RAM 403. Then, the effect state setting process ends, and the process proceeds to step S802 in FIG.

  In step S <b> 8015, the CPU 401 of the effect control unit 400 determines whether or not the current notification effect is a notification effect in the probability variation gaming state after the continuous big hit. If the determination in step S8015 is YES, the process proceeds to step S8016. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S8017.

  In step S <b> 8016, the CPU 401 sets the production state 3 indicating the probability variation gaming state as the production state stored in the RAM 403. Then, the effect state setting process ends, and the process proceeds to step S802 in FIG.

  In step S8017, the CPU 401 of the effect control unit 400 determines whether or not the current notification effect is a notification effect in the short-time gaming state after a single big hit. If the determination in step S8017 is YES, the process moves to step S8018. If the determination is NO (that is, in the normal gaming state), the process moves to step S8019.

  In step S <b> 8018, the CPU 401 sets an effect state 4 indicating the short-time game state after a single big hit as the effect state stored in the RAM 403. Then, the effect state setting process ends, and the process proceeds to step S802 in FIG.

  In step S8019, the CPU 401 sets an effect state 5 indicating the normal gaming state as the effect state stored in the RAM 403. Then, the effect state setting process ends, and the process proceeds to step S802 in FIG. It should be noted that a non-interactive effect (a post-impact dedicated effect, a selected effect in the probability variation game state), which will be described later, is executed by instructing the image sound control unit 500 to the effect state set by the effect state setting process described above. Will be.

[Production content decision processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 38, an effect content determination process by the effect control unit 400 will be described. FIG. 38 is a detailed flowchart showing an example of the effect content determination process in step S803 of FIG.

  First, in step S8031, the CPU 401 of the effect control unit 400 determines whether or not an RTC effect execution instruction is being issued. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RTC effect instruction in-progress flag stored in the RAM 403 is ON. If the determination in step S8031 is YES, the process moves to step S8039. If the determination is NO, the process moves to step S8032.

  In step S8032, the CPU 401 determines, based on the effect pattern determined in step S802 of FIG. 36, the type of symbol (so-called appearance) when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (or temporarily stopped). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8033.

  In step S8033, the CPU 401 determines whether or not the effect pattern determined in step S802 of FIG. 36 is a pseudo-continuous effect effect pattern. If the determination in step S8033 is YES, the process moves to step S8034. If the determination is NO, the process moves to step S8037.

  In step S8034, the CPU 401 refers to the sub lottery table corresponding to the effect random number and the rotation speed N to determine the number of re-variable display (pseudo continuous number) in the pseudo continuous effect, and then the process proceeds to step S8035. As will be apparent from the description below, the rotation speed N indicates the number of fluctuations (number of rotations) in which the pseudo-continuous effect with three pseudo-continuous effects is not continuously executed as the notification effect (variation effect). The sub lottery table referred to in step S8034 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S <b> 8035, the CPU 401 determines whether or not three times is determined as the number of pseudo consecutive times in the process of step S <b> 8034. If the determination in step S8035 is YES, the process proceeds to step S8036, and if this determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S8037.

  In step S8036, the CPU 401 resets and stores the value of the rotation speed N stored in the RAM 403 to the initial value “0”. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8083.

  In step S8037, the CPU 401 adds 1 to the value of the rotation speed N stored in the RAM 403 and updates and stores it. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8038.

  In step S8038, the CPU 401 determines the type of notice effect. Specifically, the CPU 401 determines whether or not to execute a reach eye establishment effect, a cut-in effect, or the like as a notice effect to be executed based on the effect random number according to the effect pattern determined in step S802 of FIG. To decide. It should be noted that the higher the reliability of the effect pattern determined in step S802, the easier it is to execute the notice effect (highly reliable cut-in effect) that further increases the player's expectation. Then, the effect content determination process ends, and the process proceeds to step S804 in FIG.

  In step S8039, the CPU 401 determines the effect content of the variation effect corresponding to the RTC effect determined to be instructed to execute in step S8031 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as an RTC-compatible change effect). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8040. Note that the RTC-compatible variation effect is a notification effect (variation effect) determined so as not to contradict the RTC effect instructed to be executed in the RTC effect control process of FIG. 31. For example, the first RTC effect or the replacement effect is When the second RTC effect is being executed, the decoration symbol is reduced and displayed in the upper left so that the execution of the effect is not hindered while being executed. When the second RTC effect is being executed, the second RTC effect (game effect). In accordance with the execution of RTC, an RTC-linked notice effect (for example, an effect in which a game character appears) is displayed for the number of times corresponding to the effect pattern (the change time of the change pattern) determined in the process of step S802. Further, the RTC corresponding variation effect execution process executed by the image sound control unit 500 based on the instruction to execute the RTC corresponding variation effect determined by the effect content determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S8040, the CPU 401 adds 1 to the value of the rotation speed N stored in the RAM 403 and updates and stores it. Then, the effect content determination process ends, and the process proceeds to step S804 in FIG.

  It should be noted that from the above-described processing of steps S8036, S8037, and S8040, while the pseudo-continuous effect with the number of pseudo-continuations 3 is not determined as the effect content, the rotation speed N is continuously counted up, and the pseudo-continuous effect with the pseudo-continuous count 3 is determined. It can be seen that it is reset to 0. Thus, the rotation speed N indicates the number of fluctuations (number of rotations) in which the pseudo-continuous effect with three pseudo-continuous effects is not continuously executed as the notification effect (variation effect).

[Sub lottery table]
FIG. 39 shows a variation pattern (about 90 seconds, about 40 seconds, and the type of the production pattern by the main control unit 100 corresponding to the pseudo-continuous production (pseudo 3 / losing, pseudo 2 / losing, pseudo 1 / losing). FIG. 19 shows an example of a sub lottery table that is referred to by the effect control unit 400 to determine the effect contents when it is determined (for example, see FIG. 19). (1) in FIG. 39 is a sub lottery table that is referred to when a variation pattern (about 15 seconds; 15.02 seconds or 15.04 seconds) corresponding to the type of effect pattern of pseudo 1 per / losing is determined. 39, (2) in FIG. 39 is referred to when a variation pattern (about 40 seconds; 40.01 seconds or 40.03 seconds) corresponding to the type of the production pattern of pseudo per 2 / losing is determined. Sub-lottery table 2 in FIG. 39 (3) shows a variation pattern (about 90 seconds; 90.01 seconds or 90.06 seconds) corresponding to the effect pattern type per pseudo-3 / losing. It is the sub lottery table 3 referred in the case.

  As shown in (1) of FIG. 39, according to the sub lottery table 1 that is referred to when the variation pattern (about 15 seconds) corresponding to the type of the effect pattern of pseudo 1 per / lost is determined, “1 When “1 to 70” is selected from the production random numbers of “˜100” (that is, at a ratio of 70%), the production content A1 having the pseudo continuous number of 1 (pseudo 1) is determined. When “71 to 100” is selected among the effect random numbers of “” (that is, at a rate of 30%), the effect content A2 having the pseudo continuous number of 2 (pseudo 2) is determined. Therefore, even if the main control unit 100 determines the variation pattern corresponding to the type of the pseudo 1 production pattern, the production control unit 400 performs the lottery using the sub lottery table 1, so Content A1) may not be determined. However, the effect content A1 of the pseudo 1 is more easily determined than the effect content A2 of the pseudo 2.

  As shown in (2) of FIG. 39, according to the sub lottery table 2 that is referred to when the variation pattern (approximately 40 seconds) corresponding to the type of the effect pattern of pseudo 2 per / lost is determined, The content of the effect is determined depending on the rotation speed N (that is, the number of fluctuations in which the pseudo-continuous effect of 3 times of the pseudo-continuous operation is not continuously executed) and the effect random number. Specifically, when the rotation speed N is “1 to 30 times”, among “1 to 100” effect random numbers, “1 to 35” is selected (that is, at a rate of 35%). When the production content B1 with the number of pseudo-continuations of 1 (pseudo 1) is determined and “36-100” is selected from the production random numbers of “1-100” (that is, at a rate of 50%), When the production content B2 with the number of times of 2 (pseudo 2) is determined and “86 to 100” is selected from the production random numbers of “1 to 100” (that is, at a rate of 15%), The effect content B3 for 3 times (pseudo 3) is determined. Similarly, when the rotation speed N is “31 to 120 times”, the effect content B1 is determined at a rate of 25%, the effect content B2 is determined at a rate of 50%, and the effect content at a rate of 25%. When B3 is determined and the rotation speed N exceeds “120 times”, the production content B1 is decided at a rate of 10%, the production content B2 is decided at a rate of 50%, and the production is produced at a rate of 40%. Content B3 is determined. That is, by performing lottery using the sub lottery table 2, the effect content B3 of the pseudo 3 is less likely to be determined as the rotation speed N is smaller, and the effect content B3 is more likely to be determined as the rotation speed N is increased. Therefore, even if the main control unit 100 determines a variation pattern corresponding to the type of the pseudo 2 effect pattern, the effect control unit 400 performs the lottery by the sub lottery table 2 so that the pseudo 3 pseudo continuous effect continues. As the number of fluctuations (the number of rotations N) that are not executed increases, the production contents for executing the pseudo 3 pseudo-continuous production are more easily determined.

  As shown in (3) of FIG. 39, according to the sub lottery table 3 referred to when the variation pattern (about 90 seconds) corresponding to the type of the effect pattern of pseudo 3 per / losing is determined, The content of the effect is determined depending on the rotation speed N (that is, the number of fluctuations in which the pseudo-continuous effect of 3 times of the pseudo-continuous operation is not continuously executed) and the effect random number. Specifically, when the rotation speed N is “1 to 30 times”, among “1 to 100” effect random numbers, “1 to 50” is selected (that is, at a rate of 50%). When the production content C2 with the number of pseudo-continuations of 2 (pseudo 2) is determined and “51-100” is selected from the production random numbers “1-100” (that is, at a rate of 50%), The effect content C3 of the number of times of 3 (pseudo 3) is determined. Similarly, when the rotation speed N is “31 to 120 times”, the effect content C2 is determined at a rate of 30%, the effect content C3 is determined at a rate of 70%, and the rotation number N is “120 times”. ], The content C2 is determined at a rate of 10%, and the content C3 is determined at a rate of 90%. That is, by performing lottery using the sub lottery table 3, the effect content C3 of the pseudo 3 is less likely to be determined as the rotation speed N is smaller, and the effect content C3 is more likely to be determined as the rotation speed N is increased. Therefore, even if the main control unit 100 determines a variation pattern corresponding to the type of the pseudo 3 effect pattern, the effect control unit 400 performs the lottery by the sub lottery table 3 so that the pseudo 3 pseudo continuous effect continues. When the number of fluctuations (rotation speed N) that is not executed is small, the ratio of the production content C2 in which the pseudo 3 pseudo-continuous performance is not executed is relatively higher than when the rotation speed N is large. Become.

  As described above, the effect control unit 400 refers to the sub lottery tables 1 to 3 to determine the content of the effect. Therefore, the effect pattern type corresponding to the variation pattern determined by the main control unit 100 is simulated. There may be a case where a pseudo-continuous effect having a pseudo-continuous number different from the continuous number is executed. Further, as can be seen from a comparison between the sub lottery table 2 and the sub lottery table 3, the sub lottery table 3 performs a pseudo-3 pseudo-continuous effect rather than the sub lottery table 2 regardless of the value of the rotation speed N. easy. That is, regardless of the value of the rotation speed N, the variation pattern determined by the main control unit 100 corresponds to the pseudo 3 effect pattern, and the change pattern corresponds to the pseudo 2 effect pattern. It is easier to execute the pseudo-three pseudo-continuous effects than in the case of the one. However, even if the variation pattern determined by the main control unit 100 corresponds to the pseudo-2 effect pattern, if the value of the rotation speed N increases (that is, the pseudo-3 pseudo-continuous effect is continuously executed). When the number of fluctuations that are not increased increases), the pseudo-three pseudo-continuous effects are easily executed. Thus, even if the main control unit 100 does not determine the variation pattern corresponding to the pseudo 3 effect pattern, the pseudo 3 pseudo continuous effect is easily executed. Therefore, the main control unit 100 does not determine the variation pattern corresponding to the pseudo 3 performance pattern for a long period of time (over a large number of variations). Even when the control unit 400 determines the variation pattern corresponding to the pseudo 2 effect pattern, the pseudo 3 simulated effect is not executed over a long period of time by facilitating the execution of the pseudo 3 simulated effect. Can be prevented. For this reason, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player's interest is reduced due to the fact that the pseudo-3 pseudo-continuous effect (that is, the highly expected effect) is not executed. On the other hand, when the pseudo-3 pseudo continuous effect has been executed recently (that is, when the value of the rotation speed N is small), the main control unit 100 determines a variation pattern corresponding to the pseudo-3 effect pattern. Even so, the appearance control unit 400 can suppress the appearance frequency of the pseudo-3 pseudo-continuous effect by reducing the rate at which the pseudo-3 pseudo-continuous effect is executed. For this reason, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the rare feeling of the high expectation performance is impaired due to frequent occurrence of the pseudo 3 pseudo-continuous performance (that is, the high expectation effect).

  In the example of the sub lottery table shown in FIG. 39, no particular distinction is made as to whether the fluctuation pattern indicates a big hit or a loss, but a different sub lottery depends on whether it is a big hit or a loss. A table may be referred to. More specifically, a sub lottery table may be referred to in which the content of the production having a larger number of pseudo-continuations is more easily selected in the case of a big hit than in the case of a loss.

  As described above, various effects (RTC effects, round effects, selected drama reach effects, partial drama reach effects, full special effects, short effects, etc., which are characteristic in this embodiment, which will be described later, are performed by timer interruption processing performed by the effect control unit 400. A special effect, a pseudo-continuous effect, a dedicated effect after a sudden impact, a selection effect during probability variation game, and the like are determined, and the image sound control unit 500 is instructed to execute these effects. Hereinafter, timer interruption processing performed by the image sound control unit 500 based on execution instructions for various effects from the effect control unit 400 will be described.

[Timer interrupt processing by the image sound controller]
40 to 59 are flowcharts showing an example of timer interruption processing performed by the image sound control unit 500. Hereinafter, timer interrupt processing performed in the image sound control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 to 59. Based on the instruction from the effect control unit 400, the image sound control unit 500 performs the processes shown in FIGS. 40 to 59 for a certain period of time during normal operation except for special cases such as when the power is turned on or when the power is turned off. Repeatedly (for example, 33 milliseconds). Note that the processing performed by the image sound control unit 500 described based on the flowcharts of FIGS. 40 to 59 is executed based on a program stored in the ROM 502. Also, in the flowcharts shown in FIGS. 40 to 59, the description of the portions other than the characteristic effects in the present embodiment is simplified.

[RTC effect execution processing]
First, an RTC effect execution process executed by the CPU 501 of the image sound control unit 500 based on an RTC effect execution instruction from the effect control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S1050 of FIG. 40, the CPU 501 of the image sound control unit 500 performs a first RTC effect / replacement effect execution process. Details of the first RTC effect / replacement effect execution process will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1080.

  In step S1080, the CPU 501 performs a second RTC effect execution process. Details of the second RTC effect will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1100.

  In step S1100, CPU 501 determines whether or not an instruction to end RTC effect (first RTC effect, replacement effect, or second RTC effect) is received from effect control unit 400. If the determination in step S1100 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1110. If this determination is NO, the RTC effect execution process ends, and the process illustrated in FIG. 40 is repeatedly performed again at the timing of the next timer interrupt process. To do.

  In step S1110, the CPU 501 sets the end standby flag to ON and stores it in the RAM 503. Here, the end standby flag is a flag indicating that the RTC effect end instruction has been received by being set to ON. Then, the RTC effect execution process ends, and the process shown in FIG. 40 is repeatedly executed again at the timing of the next timer interrupt process.

[First RTC effect / replacement effect execution process]
Next, the first RTC effect / replacement effect execution process by the image sound control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a detailed flowchart showing an example of the first RTC effect / replacement effect execution process in step S1050 of FIG.

  In step S1051 of FIG. 41, the CPU 501 determines whether or not an end standby flag stored in the RAM 503 is ON (that is, whether or not an RTC effect end instruction has been received). If the determination in step S1051 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1060. If this determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S1052.

  In step S1052, CPU 501 determines whether or not an instruction to execute the first RTC effect or replacement effect has been received from effect control unit 400. If the determination in step S1052 is YES, the process moves to step S1053, and if this determination is NO, the process moves to step S1056.

  In step S1053, the CPU 501 determines whether or not the pre-RTC start variation effect or jackpot effect is being executed. Here, the fluctuation effect before the start of the RTC is a notification effect (fluctuation effect) that is already being executed when an instruction to execute the RTC effect (first RTC effect, second RTC effect, replacement effect) is received. These are effects (opening effects, round effects, ending effects) executed in the big hit gaming state. If the determination in step S1053 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1054. If this determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S1055.

  In step S1054, the CPU 501 wipes and displays the RTC effect (first RTC effect or replacement effect) for which the execution instruction is received in step S1052. Here, the wipe display is to display an effect in the wipe area 6w (see (1A) in FIG. 62 described later) in which a part of the entire screen of the image display unit 6 is cut out. According to this, it is possible to prevent other effects already being executed in the image display unit 6 from being hindered. Then, the first RTC effect / replacement effect execution process ends, and the process proceeds to step S1080 in FIG.

  In step S1055, CPU 501 displays the RTC effect (first RTC effect or replacement effect) that received the execution instruction in step S1052 in full screen. Here, the full screen display is to display an effect on the full screen of the image display unit 6. Then, the first RTC effect / replacement effect execution process ends, and the process proceeds to step S1080 in FIG.

  In step S1056, the CPU 501 determines whether or not the first RTC effect or replacement effect is being displayed in wipe. If the determination in step S1056 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1057. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S1059.

  In step S1057, the CPU 501 determines whether or not the pre-RTC start variation effect has ended. If the determination in step S1057 is YES, the process moves to step S1058. If the determination is NO, the process moves to step S1059.

  In step S1058, the CPU 501 switches the RTC effect currently being executed from the wipe display to the full screen display. Then, the first RTC effect / replacement effect execution process ends, and the process proceeds to step S1080 in FIG.

  In step S1059, the CPU 501 continuously displays the effect currently being executed as it is. Then, the first RTC effect / replacement effect execution process ends, and the process proceeds to step S1080 in FIG.

  In step S1060, the CPU 501 determines whether or not the RTC compatible variation effect has ended or whether the jackpot effect is being performed. Note that, as described above, the RTC compatible variation effect is determined so as not to contradict the RTC effect, and is a variation effect (notification effect) corresponding to the RTC effect. For example, the decorative design is reduced and displayed on the upper left. It is an effect that is displayed. If the determination in step S1060 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1061, and if this determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S1059.

  In step S <b> 1061, the CPU 501 ends the RTC effect being executed (the first RTC effect or the replacement effect), and sets the end standby flag stored in the RAM 503 to OFF. Then, the first RTC effect / replacement effect execution process ends, and the process proceeds to step S1080 in FIG. An outline of the first RTC effect / replacement effect will be described later with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62.

[Second RTC effect execution process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the 2nd RTC effect execution process by the image sound control part 500 is demonstrated. FIG. 42 is a detailed flowchart showing an example of the second RTC effect execution process in step S1080 of FIG.

  In step S1081 of FIG. 42, the CPU 501 determines whether or not the end standby flag stored in the RAM 503 is ON (that is, whether or not an RTC effect end instruction has been received). If the determination in step S1081 is YES, the process moves to step S1095. If the determination is NO, the process moves to step S1082.

  In step S1082, CPU 501 determines whether or not an instruction to execute the second RTC effect is received from effect control unit 400. If the determination in step S1082 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1083, and if this determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S1086. As described above with reference to FIG. 33, in the present embodiment, in the big hit gaming state, the probability variation gaming state, and the short-time gaming state, the second RTC presentation is performed from the presentation control unit 400 to the image sound control unit 500. The execution instruction is not performed (that is, the process of step S108 in FIG. 31 is not performed because NO is determined in step S107 in FIG. 31). For this reason, in these gaming states, the determination in step S1082 is NO.

  In step S1083, the CPU 501 determines whether or not the pre-RTC start variation effect is being executed. If the determination in step S1083 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1084. If this determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S1085.

  In step S1084, the CPU 501 wipes and displays the second RTC effect. Then, the second RTC effect execution process ends, and the process moves to step S1100 in FIG.

  In step S1085, the CPU 501 displays the second RTC effect on the full screen. Then, the second RTC effect execution process ends, and the process moves to step S1100 in FIG.

  In step S1086, the CPU 501 determines whether or not the second RTC effect is being wipe displayed. If the determination in step S1086 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1087, and if this determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S1092.

  In step S1087, the CPU 501 determines whether or not the pre-RTC start variation effect has ended. If the determination in step S1087 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1088. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S1089.

  In step S1088, CPU 501 switches the second RTC effect currently being executed from wipe display to full screen display. Then, the second RTC effect execution process ends, and the process moves to step S1100 in FIG.

  In step S1089, the CPU 501 determines whether it is the start timing of the simultaneous game effect in the second RTC effect. Here, the second RTC effect is the game effect described above in the present embodiment, but more specifically, a 30-second preparation effect, a subsequent simultaneous game effect, and a subsequent end effect (in some cases, an extension) It is a series of effects consisting of game effects. Therefore, the CPU 501 determines whether or not it is the start timing of this simultaneous game effect in the second RTC effect (more specifically, the timing when 30 seconds have elapsed from the second set time). The details of the simultaneous game effect will be described later with reference to FIG. If the determination in step S1089 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1090. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S1091.

  In step S1090, CPU 501 makes the display mode of the second RTC effect (more specifically, the simultaneous game effect) semi-transparent and displays it in full screen. Then, the second RTC effect execution process ends, and the process moves to step S1100 in FIG.

  In step S1091, the CPU 501 continuously displays the currently executed effect as it is. Then, the second RTC effect execution process ends, and the process moves to step S1100 in FIG.

  In step S1092, the CPU 501 determines whether or not the second RTC effect is being displayed with a semi-transparent display. If the determination in step S1092 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1093. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S1091.

  In step S1093, the CPU 501 determines whether or not the pre-RTC start variation effect has ended. If the determination in step S1093 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1094. If this determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S1091.

  In step S1094, the CPU 501 switches and displays the second RTC effect that has been displayed semi-transparently to a normal display form (display form that is not semi-transparent display). Then, the second RTC effect execution process ends, and the process moves to step S1100 in FIG.

  In step S1095, the CPU 501 determines whether or not the RTC compatible variation effect has ended. If the determination in step S1095 is YES, the process moves to step S1096. If the determination is NO, the process moves to step S1091.

  In step S1096, the CPU 501 ends the second RTC effect and sets the end standby flag to OFF. Then, the second RTC effect execution process ends, and the process moves to step S1100 in FIG.

  As described above, in the second RTC effect, the simultaneous game effect is started at the timing when 30 seconds have elapsed since the start instruction of the second RTC effect was received (that is, 30 seconds have elapsed from the second set time). Therefore, when the simultaneous game effect is started, the variation effect before the start of RTC is not completed (that is, NO in step S1087 and NO in step S1089). It will continue for more than 30 seconds. Here, the variation effect before the start of the RTC is a variation effect that is already being executed when an instruction to execute the RTC effect is received. This means that an effect (for example, an effect based on the type of effect pattern developed into SP reach or SPSP reach shown in FIG. 19) is being executed. At this time, since the second RTC effect (simultaneous game effect) is displayed in a semi-transparent display, an SP reach effect or an SPSP reach effect with a long variation time (relatively high reliability) is executed. Sometimes, the simultaneous game effects are displayed semi-transparently, thereby ensuring the visibility of the highly reliable SP reach effects and SPSP reach effects. On the other hand, as described above, in the plurality of gaming machines 1 (see FIG. 9) installed on one island in the pachinko hall, the time information measured by each RTC 404 is synchronized. For this reason, the simultaneous game effect is simultaneously executed on the plurality of gaming machines 1, but even if the high-reliability SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect is executed, it is displayed in a translucent manner (that is, executed). Therefore, as a whole gaming system composed of a plurality of gaming machines 1 installed on one island, it is possible not to impair the sense of unity of the simultaneous game production. Note that the outline of the second RTC effect (simultaneous effect) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64.

[Opening effect execution processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 43, an opening effect process executed by the CPU 501 of the image sound control unit 500 based on an opening effect execution instruction from the effect control unit 400 will be described.

  In step S <b> 1210 of FIG. 43, the CPU 501 determines whether or not an instruction for executing the opening effect has been received from the effect control unit 400. If the determination in step S1210 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1211. If the determination is NO, the opening effect process ends, and the process illustrated in FIG. 43 is repeatedly executed again at the timing of the next timer interrupt process. .

  In step S1211, the CPU 501 determines whether or not the big hit is a big hit from the normal gaming state (so-called initial hit) based on the opening command received via the effect control unit 400. If the determination in step S1211 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1212. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S1213.

  In step S <b> 1212, the CPU 501 deletes the history information stored in the RAM 503. By the way, the CPU 501 has, for example, the number of prize balls paid out based on the game ball winnings to the first starting port 21, the second starting port 22, the normal winning port 24, etc. in the normal gaming state, and the first big in the big hit gaming state. It stores history information such as the number of winning balls paid out based on the game ball winning to the winning port 23, the second big winning port 51, etc., the number of jackpots. Since the history information is erased by the process of step S1212, after the opening effect is started (that is, after the big hit game is started), the first big winning opening 23, the second big winning opening 51, etc. The number of award balls paid out based on the game ball winning will be newly counted. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1213.

  In step S <b> 1213, the CPU 501 stores the big hit history in the RAM 503. Specifically, the CPU 501 adds 1 to the value of the jackpot number Wc stored in the RAM 503 and updates the RAM 503 as history information. As a result of this processing, the number of consecutive big hits Wc is stored in the RAM 503 as history information. Note that the big hit count Wc is set to 0 as an initial value, and is reset to 0 by the process of step S1212 described above. However, as a reset condition, the gaming state is controlled to the normal gaming state after the big hit game is finished. It is good also as what is reset to 0 on the condition. Further, as the jackpot history, in addition to the jackpot number Wc described above, information indicating the type of jackpot (any of jackpots A to D shown in FIG. 6) may be stored in the RAM 503. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1214.

  In step S1214, the CPU 501 starts an opening effect for a specified time. Here, the opening effect is an effect for notifying the start of the big hit game, and is typically an image effect that prompts the player to launch a game ball toward the first big prize opening 23. Then, the opening effect execution process ends, and the process shown in FIG. 43 is repeatedly executed again at the timing of the next timer interrupt process.

[Winning process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the winning process executed by the CPU 501 of the image sound control unit 500 based on the winning process start instruction from the effect control unit 400 will be described.

  In step S1250 of FIG. 44, the CPU 501 determines whether or not a winning process start instruction from the effect control unit 400 has been received. If the determination in step S1250 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1251, and if this determination is NO, the winning process is terminated, and the process illustrated in FIG. 44 is repeatedly executed again at the timing of the next timer interrupt process.

  In step S1251, the CPU 501 determines whether or not the winning process instructed in step S1250 is based on a game ball winning (V winning) in the V area 53. If the determination in step S1251 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1252, and if this determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S1254.

  In step S1252, the CPU 501 determines whether or not the output completion flag stored in the RAM 503 is OFF. Here, the output completion flag is a flag indicating that the V winning effect described later has been executed by being set to ON. If the determination in step S1252 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1253, and if this determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S1254.

  In step S1253, the CPU 501 executes a V winning effect (for example, output of a specific sound effect or display of a specific V image) for notifying that a V prize has been won, and sets the output completion flag stored in the RAM 503 to ON. . As a result, it is shown that the V winning effect has already been executed, and the V winning effect is executed only once during one big hit. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1254.

  In step S <b> 1254, the CPU 501 determines the winning ports (first starting port 21, second starting port 22, first major winning port 23, second major winning port 51) based on the winning instruction instructed from the effect control unit 400. The number of game balls won in the normal winning opening 24) is counted up and stored in the RAM 503. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1255.

  In step S1255, when the CPU 501 receives a winning instruction based on a game ball winning at the first grand prize opening 23 and the second big winning opening 51 (that is, the game to the first big winning opening 23 and the second big prize opening 51). When one ball is won), the corresponding number of winning balls “13” is added to the total number T of winning balls stored in the RAM 503 and updated. The award ball total number T is set to 0 as an initial value, and is reset to 0 by the process of step S1212 described above. However, the reset condition is that the gaming state is controlled to the normal gaming state after the big hit game is finished. It may be reset to 0 on condition that As a result of the processing of step S1255, the total number T of winning balls acquired during the big hit is stored in the RAM 503 as the big hit history. Further, in the present embodiment, the total number T of winning balls is calculated by adding the number of winning balls paid out based on the game ball winnings to the first big winning opening 23 and the second big winning opening 51. However, not only the game ball winnings to the first big winning opening 23 and the second big winning opening 51, but also the number of winning balls paid out based on the game ball winnings to other winning holes is added together. It may be a thing. For example, when a winning instruction corresponding to a game ball winning to the first starting port 21 or the second starting port 22 is received, the first starting port is added by adding the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning to the total number T of winning balls. It is also possible to add together the number of prize balls that have been paid out based on the game ball winning to 21 or the second starting port 22. In addition, when a winning instruction corresponding to a game ball winning in the normal winning opening 24 is received, the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning is added to the total number T of winning balls, so that the game ball winning in the normal winning opening 24 is based. It is also possible to add together the number of prize balls that have been paid out. That is, the total number T of the winning balls is added in combination with any of the number of winning balls paid out based on the game ball winnings to the first starting port 21, the second starting port 22, and the normal winning port 24. All may be added. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1256.

  In step S1256, the CPU 501 displays information indicating the total number of prize balls T updated in the RAM 503 by the process in step S1255 on the image display unit 6. As a result, the image display unit 6 displays the total number T of prize balls updated every time a game ball wins the first big prize opening 23 and the second big prize opening 51 during the round game. Then, the winning process is terminated, and the process shown in FIG. 44 is repeatedly executed again at the timing of the next timer interrupt process.

[Ending production process]
Next, referring to FIG. 45, an ending effect process executed by the CPU 501 of the image sound control unit 500 based on an instruction to execute an ending effect from the effect control unit 400 will be described.

  In step S1290 of FIG. 45, CPU 501 determines whether or not an ending effect execution instruction has been received from effect control unit 400. If the determination in step S1290 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1291. If this determination is NO, the opening effect process ends, and the process illustrated in FIG. 45 is repeatedly executed again at the timing of the next timer interrupt process. .

  In step S1291, the CPU 501 executes an ending effect for a specified time. Here, the ending effect is an effect of notifying the end of the big hit game, and is typically an effect of displaying the mark of the manufacturer of the gaming machine 1. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1292.

  In step S1292, the CPU 501 performs a mode effect (for example, a mode indicating a probable game state) executed after the ending effect (that is, after the end of the big hit game effect) based on the ending effect instruction (ending command). Effect) is executed in advance in the lower layer of the ending effect displayed on the image display unit 6. Specifically, the ending command is transmitted based on the jackpot symbol (for example, jackpot A shown in FIG. 6), and includes information on the performance state after the jackpot game ends (in other words, after the jackpot game ends) Since the ending command corresponding to the effect state is transmitted), the CPU 501 knows the effect state after the end of the big hit game before receiving the game state notification command transmitted along with the customer waiting command or the notification effect start command. be able to. For this reason, the CPU 501 executes the effect in advance corresponding to each effect state before the customer waiting command or the notification effect start command is transmitted, so that the big hit game is immediately performed at the timing when the ending effect ends. The production in the production state after the end can be started. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1293.

  In step S1293, the CPU 501 sets the output completion flag stored in the RAM 503 to OFF. As a result, when the jackpot game is started next and the V prize is realized for the first time during the jackpot game, the V prize effect is executed. Then, the ending effect process ends, and the process shown in FIG. 45 is repeatedly executed again at the timing of the next timer interrupt process.

[Round effect processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 46, a round effect process executed by the CPU 501 of the image sound control unit 500 based on a round effect execution instruction from the effect control unit 400 will be described. In the present embodiment, a round effect executed in the V round is referred to as a V round effect, and a round effect executed in a round other than the V round is referred to as a normal round effect. In the present embodiment, as the normal round effect, a selection effect that allows the player to select the effect content or a non-selected effect that is a predetermined effect content that the player cannot select the effect content is executed. The selection effect is selected and executed from the additional update effects that are updated according to the time indicated by the RTC 404.

  In step S <b> 1230 of FIG. 46, the CPU 501 determines whether or not a round effect execution instruction has been received from the effect control unit 400. If the determination in step S1230 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1231, and if this determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S1238.

  In step S1231, the CPU 501 displays the current round number on the image display unit 6 based on the information indicating the current round number R instructed from the effect control unit 400, and is stored in the RAM 503 as a big hit history. Information indicating the number of hits Wc is displayed on the image display unit 6. However, the CPU 501 does not display the number of rounds in the case of a round that can be opened only for a very short time (for example, 0.1 second). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1232.

  In step S1232, the CPU 501 determines whether or not the execution instruction of the round effect received in step S1230 is an execution instruction of the V round effect (that is, the 8R round effect of big hit A or big hit D shown in FIG. 6). Whether or not). If the determination in step S1232 is YES, the process moves to step S1234, and if this determination is NO, the process moves to step S1233.

  In step S1233, the CPU 501 executes a normal round effect as a round effect. Specifically, the CPU 501 starts the normal round effect when receiving an instruction to execute the 1R round effect in step S1230, and is executing when receiving an instruction to execute another round effect. Continue normal round production. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1238.

  In step S1234, the CPU 501 determines whether or not the selection effect is being executed among the normal round effects. If the determination in step S1234 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1235, and if this determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S1236. Details of the selection effect will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1235, CPU 501 temporarily stops the selection effect being executed. Specifically, CPU 501 temporarily stops the output of the effect image and the effect sound of the selected effect at the specified time being executed, and stores the temporary stop timing in RAM 503. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1237.

  In step S1236, the CPU 501 stops displaying the non-selection effect being executed. Specifically, the CPU 501 hides the image of the non-selection effect being executed. At this time, the output of the non-selected effect sound may be continued. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1237.

  In step S1237, CPU 501 starts the V round effect. Here, the V round effect is an effect executed during the V long round game of the big hit game. For example, a notification image for instructing the V area 53 to aim for winning a game ball is displayed, or the V area 53 is displayed. This is an effect of displaying an image showing the V character after the game ball is won (see (4) of FIG. 66 described later). Then, the round effect process ends, and the process shown in FIG. 46 is repeatedly executed again at the timing of the next timer interrupt process.

  In step S1238, CPU 501 determines whether or not an instruction to end V-round effect has been received from effect control unit 400. If the determination in step S1238 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1239, and if this determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S1243.

  In step S1239, CPU 501 ends the V round effect being executed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1240.

  In step S1240, CPU 501 determines whether or not the selection effect is paused. Specifically, CPU 501 determines whether or not the temporary stop timing of the selected effect is stored in RAM 503. If the determination in step S1240 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1241, and if this determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S1242.

  In step S1241, the CPU 501 resumes the selection effect. Specifically, based on the pause timing stored in the RAM 503, the output of the image of the selected effect and the output of the effect sound are resumed from the paused location. In addition, the CPU 501 deletes the temporary stop timing of the selection effect stored in the RAM 503. Then, the round effect process ends, and the process shown in FIG. 46 is repeatedly executed again at the timing of the next timer interrupt process.

  In step S <b> 1242, the CPU 501 restarts the display of the non-selected effect image that was not being displayed. Then, the round effect process ends, and the process shown in FIG. 46 is repeatedly executed again at the timing of the next timer interrupt process.

  In step S1243, the CPU 501 determines whether or not a round effect is being performed (during a normal round effect or a V round effect). If the determination in step S1243 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1244. If this determination is NO, the round effect process ends, and the process illustrated in FIG. 46 is repeatedly performed again at the timing of the next timer interrupt process. .

  In step S1244, CPU 501 determines whether or not the selection effect is being executed. If the determination in step S1244 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1245, and if this determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S1246.

  In step S1245, CPU 501 executes the effect selection process, ends the round effect process, and repeatedly executes the process shown in FIG. 46 again at the timing of the next timer interrupt process. Details of this effect selection process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1246, CPU 501 continues the effect (non-selection effect or V-round effect) being executed. Then, the round effect process ends, and the process shown in FIG. 46 is repeatedly executed again at the timing of the next timer interrupt process.

  When the first RTC effect / replacement effect is executed by the first RTC effect / replacement effect execution process when the round effect process described above is being executed, the first RTC effect / replacement effect is a wipe area 6w (described later). The wipe is displayed in (see (1A) of FIG. 62).

[Direction selection process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 47, an effect selection process by the image sound control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 47 is a detailed flowchart showing an example of the effect selection process in step S1245 of FIG.

  In step S1301 of FIG. 47, the CPU 501 of the image sound control unit 500 starts or continues execution of the selection effect set in the RAM 503. The selection effect is an effect that is executed during the jackpot game or in the probability variation game state, which will be described later in detail, and is an additional update effect that is updated according to the time indicated by the RTC 404 (see (5) in FIG. 32). It is set in the RAM 503 by the player's selection operation (operation of the effect key 38) (see steps S1304, 1306, 1310, and 1313 described later). If there is no selection operation by the player, a preset effect (for example, a play effect “A-1”) is set in the RAM 503 as a selection effect. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1302.

  In step S1302, the CPU 501 determines whether an effect selection screen is being displayed. Although the details will be described later, the effect selection screen is a screen (see (1) of FIG. 66 described later) for selecting an effect (additional update effect) executed by the player as the selection effect, and is displayed in the initial state. The display is started when the left and right keys of the effect key 38 are not operated (see step S1304, which will be described later). For example, the display is hidden when a predetermined time elapses without any operation (see step S1317, which will be described later). If the determination in step S1302 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1309, and if this determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S1303.

  In step S1303, the CPU 501 determines whether or not the left and right keys of the effect key 38 have been operated. The operation state for the effect key 38 is detected by the effect control unit 400 and transmitted to the image sound control unit 500. If the determination in step S1303 is YES, the process moves to step S1304. If the determination is NO, the process moves to step S1305.

  In step S1304, the CPU 501 displays (appears) an effect selection screen. In the effect selection screen, a cursor (see (1) in FIG. 66) for displaying the name of the additional update effect (selected effect) currently set (set in the RAM 503) is displayed. Here, although this cursor is fixedly displayed, the name (identification information) of the additional update effect displayed in the cursor by the operation of the player's effect key 38 to be described later is switched and displayed. It is indicated that the additional update effect displayed in the cursor is switched as the selection effect. In the present embodiment, in order to simplify the description, the name of the additional update effect “A-1” or the like is described as “A-1” or the like. Then, the effect selection process ends, and the process shown in FIG. 46 is repeatedly executed again at the timing of the next timer interrupt process.

  In step S1305, the CPU 501 determines whether or not the up / down key of the effect key 38 has been operated. If the determination in step S1305 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1306, and if this determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S1307.

  In step S1306, the CPU 501 switches the selected effect according to the operation of the up / down key of the effect key 38, sets it in the RAM 503, and starts displaying the set (after switching) selected effect. Then, the effect selection process ends, and the process shown in FIG. 46 is repeatedly executed again at the timing of the next timer interrupt process.

  Here, with reference to (1) of FIG. 60, the switching of the selection effect in step S1306 will be described. As described above with reference to FIG. 32, the additional update effect is specified from the theater effects of categories A to D stored in the ROM 502 according to the time indicated by the current RTC 404 (that is, according to the phase). Specifically, for example, when 6 weeks have passed since the gaming machine was operated, the category A phase is updated to 30 (5 × 6), and the category B phase is updated to 36 (6 × 6). The phase of category C is updated to 6 (1 × 6), and the phase of category D is updated to 6 (1 × 6). Therefore, as the additional update effects, the theater effects “A-1” to “A-30”, “B-1” to “B-36”, “C-1” to “C-6”, “D-1” "To" D-6 "are specified. When the process of step S1306 is executed (that is, when the effect selection screen is not displayed and the up / down key operation of the effect key 38 is performed), these additional update effects are shown in FIG. As shown in (1) of 60, it is virtually arranged in the order of categories A, B, C, D and in ascending order of numbers in the category, and from among the additional update effects according to the operation of the up and down keys The selected presentation effect is switched. For example, if the selection effect currently set in the RAM 503 is “A-30”, if the up key is operated once, the selection effect is switched to “A-29” arranged immediately above, and the RAM 503 is selected. When the down key is operated once, the selected effect is switched to “B-1” arranged immediately below and updated in the RAM 503. As described above, in the present embodiment, the selected effect can be switched by operating the up and down keys of the effect key 38 when the effect selection screen is not displayed, in other words, the effect selection for selecting the selected effect. Selection effects can be switched without displaying a screen. When the selection effect is switched in this manner, the switched selection effect starts to be reproduced from the beginning of the effect.

  Returning to FIG. 47, in step S <b> 1307, the CPU 501 determines whether or not the effect button 37 has been pressed. The operation state for the effect button 37 is detected by the lamp control unit 600 and transmitted to the image sound control unit 500 via the effect control unit 400. If the determination in step S1307 is YES, the process moves to step S1308. If this determination is NO, the effect selection process ends, and the process shown in FIG. 46 is repeatedly executed again at the timing of the next timer interrupt process. .

  In step S <b> 1308, the CPU 501 switches the selection mode when selecting the selected effect according to the pressing operation of the effect button 37. Here, the selection mode means that the next selection effect (theatrical effect) is automatically selected from the additional update effects when there is no selection of the selected effect by the player when one selection effect (theatrical effect) ends. In this case, for example, there are a sequential selection mode within the same category, a random selection mode within the same category, and a random selection mode within all categories. In the same category sequential selection mode, an additional update effect that is the same category (any one of categories A to D) as the currently selected (stored in the RAM 503) selection effect is sequentially selected (in the RAM 503). For example, when “A-5” is currently being executed, “A-6” which is the next order is executed. The random selection mode within the same category is a mode in which an additional update effect that is the same category as the currently selected selection effect is executed at random. For example, when “A-5” is currently executed, Is a mode in which “A-2” is executed. The all-category random selection mode is a mode in which an additional update effect is randomly executed regardless of the category of the currently selected selection effect. For example, when “A-5” is currently being executed, "B-3" is executed in the mode. Thus, in this embodiment, the selection mode can be switched by operating the effect button 37 when the effect selection screen is not displayed. Then, the effect selection process ends, and the process shown in FIG. 46 is repeatedly executed again at the timing of the next timer interrupt process.

  In step S1309, the CPU 501 determines whether or not the left and right keys of the effect key 38 have been operated. If the determination in step S1309 is YES, the process moves to step S1310. If the determination is NO, the process moves to step S1312.

  In step S1310, CPU 501 executes category display switching on the effect selection screen in accordance with the operation of the left and right keys of effect key 38 (see (2B) in FIG. 66 described later). The name of the additional update effect displayed in the cursor in the category before switching and the name of the additional update effect displayed in the cursor in the category after switching are associated in advance. When “A-4” of category A is displayed in the cursor in the category, when switching to category B, “B-4” of category B is displayed in the cursor. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1311.

  In step S1311, the CPU 501 sets an additional update effect of the name displayed in the cursor after category switching as a selection effect in the RAM 503, and starts the selection effect. Then, the effect selection process ends, and the process shown in FIG. 46 is repeatedly executed again at the timing of the next timer interrupt process.

  In step S1312, the CPU 501 determines whether or not the up / down key of the effect key 38 has been operated. If the determination in step S1312 is YES, the process moves to step S1313. If the determination is NO, the process moves to step S1315.

  In step S1313, the CPU 501 performs display switching within the cursor. Specifically, the CPU 501 switches the display of the name of the additional update effect displayed in the cursor in the category of the effect selection screen according to the operation of the up / down key of the effect key 38. Thereby, the additional update effect displayed in the cursor is transitionally displayed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1314.

  In step S1314, the CPU 501 sets an additional update effect of the name displayed in the cursor after switching in the RAM 503 as a selection effect, and starts the selection effect. Then, the effect selection process ends, and the process shown in FIG. 46 is repeatedly executed again at the timing of the next timer interrupt process.

  Here, with reference to (2) of FIG. 60, the display switching of the category in step S1310 and the display switching in the cursor in step S1313 will be described. Now, as described above with reference to (1) of FIG. 60, six weeks have passed since the operation of the gaming machine, and the theater effects “A-1” to “A-30” of category A as additional update effects. Category B theater productions “B-1” to “B-36”, Category C theater productions “C-1” to “C-6”, Category D theater productions “D-1” to “D-6” "Is specified. At this time, when the process of step S1310 is performed (that is, when the left and right keys of the effect key are operated while the effect selection screen is displayed), as shown in (2) of FIG. The category of additional update production (theatrical production) is switched sequentially. Specifically, for example, when the category on the currently displayed effect selection screen is category A, if the left key operation is performed once, the operation is switched to category D, and the right key operation is performed once. Switch to category B. If the additional update effect displayed in the cursor at this time is “A-4”, the additional update effect displayed in the cursor is “D-4” when the left key is operated once. It is switched and updated in the RAM 503, and when the right key is operated once, the additional update effect displayed in the cursor is switched to “B-4” and updated in the RAM 503. That is, by switching the category, an additional update effect corresponding to the switched category is set as the selection effect. On the other hand, when the process of step S1313 is performed (that is, when the up / down key operation of the effect key is performed while the effect selection screen is displayed), the additional update effect in each category is shown in FIG. As shown in (2), for each category, the selection effects selected from the additional update effects are switched according to the operation of the up and down keys, arranged in ascending order of the numbers in the categories. For example, when the current category is category A and the selection effect currently set in the RAM 503 is “A-2”, the selection effect is changed to “A-1” when the up key is operated once. Switched and updated in the RAM 503. When the down key is operated once, the selected effect is switched to “A-3” and updated in the RAM 503. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the effect selection screen is displayed, the category of the additional update effect that can be selected as the selected effect can be switched by operating the left and right keys of the effect key 38. By performing the key operation, it is possible to switch the additional update effect set as the selected effect within the current category.

  In step S <b> 1315, the CPU 501 determines whether or not there has been an operation of pressing the effect button 37 (an operation for determining an additional update effect displayed in the currently displayed cursor as a selected effect). If the determination in step S1315 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1317. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S1316.

  In step S <b> 1316, the CPU 501 has passed 3 seconds after the display switching of the category or the display update of the additional update effect in the cursor, or such display switching is not performed (that is, the effect selection screen). It is determined whether or not 3 seconds have elapsed. If the determination in step S1316 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1317. If this determination is NO, the effect selection process ends, and the process illustrated in FIG. 46 is repeatedly executed again at the timing of the next timer interrupt process. .

  In step S1317, CPU 501 hides the displayed effect selection screen. Moreover, CPU501 enlarges the display area of the selection effect being performed in connection with hiding the effect selection screen. Then, the effect selection process ends, and the process shown in FIG. 46 is repeatedly executed again at the timing of the next timer interrupt process.

  As described above, according to the effect selection process described above, the effect key 38 and the effect button 37 can provide different functions depending on whether or not the effect selection screen is displayed on the image display unit 6. Specifically, the left and right keys of the effect key 38 are used for switching the category of the selected effect when the effect selection screen is displayed, while the effect selection screen is displayed when the effect selection screen is not displayed. When the effect selection screen is displayed, the up and down keys of the effect key 38 are used for selection of the selected effect within the same category, while the effect selection screen is not displayed. Is used for switching a selection effect to be executed from among all additional update effects. The effect button 37 is used for switching the selection mode when the effect selection screen is not displayed, and as an opportunity to hide the effect selection screen when the effect selection screen is displayed. Used. Although the details will be described later, the left and right keys of the effect key 38 are also used to change the set volume level in the customer waiting state (see steps S7208 and S7209 in FIG. 49 to be described later). Are used for selection of reach production on the reach selection screen before the selected theater reach production is executed (see (3) of FIG. 68 described later). In addition, the outline | summary of the above-mentioned round effect (selection effect) is later mentioned with reference to FIG. 65, FIG.

[Waiting for customers]
Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the customer waiting process executed by the CPU 501 of the image sound control unit 500 based on the start instruction of the customer waiting process from the effect control unit 400 will be described.

  In step S701 in FIG. 48, the CPU 501 determines whether or not an instruction to start the customer waiting process has been received from the effect control unit 400. If the determination in step S701 is YES, the process proceeds to step S702. If the determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S709.

  In step S <b> 702, the CPU 501 determines whether or not the effect that has been executed before receiving the instruction to start the customer waiting process is an RTC effect or a selection effect that is executed in the probability variation gaming state. In the present embodiment, the selection effect is executed not only in the big hit game round when the big hit D is won as described above, but also in the probability variation game state. Further, as will be apparent from the following description, the selection effect and the RTC effect executed in the probability variation gaming state are continuously executed without stopping the progress of the effect even in the customer waiting state. The production will be called continuous production. If the determination in step S702 is YES, the process proceeds to step S703, and if this determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S705.

  In step S <b> 703, the CPU 501 continuously executes the ongoing effect as it is being executed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S704.

  In step S <b> 704, the CPU 501 uses the counter function capable of measuring time used for displaying the image on the image display unit 6, and the elapsed time since receiving the customer waiting process start instruction (more specifically, Then, the counting of the elapsed time (P) since the continuation effect was executed in the customer waiting state is started. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S709.

  In step S <b> 705, the CPU 501 determines whether or not the effect that was being executed before receiving the instruction to start the customer waiting process is an effect that is executed in the short-time gaming state after the big hit (a post-crash dedicated effect). judge. The details of the post-crash dedicated effect will be described later with reference to FIGS. 73 and 74, but are effects selected by the player from the currently set replacement update effects. If the determination in step S705 is yes, the process proceeds to step S706. If the determination is no, the process proceeds to step S707.

  In step S <b> 706, the CPU 501 temporarily stops the progress of the dedicated effect after the collision, and stores the temporary stop timing in the RAM 503. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S707.

  In step S <b> 707, the CPU 501 starts displaying a customer waiting screen on the image display unit 6. Here, the customer waiting screen is the specified fixed time (0.5 seconds) after the fact that all the decorative symbols that have been variably displayed are completely stopped and the result of the special symbol lottery is reported to be lost This is a stop screen that is displayed when there is no next notification effect to be executed at the time of display (that is, when there is no hold), and is a screen indicating that the notification effect is not being executed. The customer waiting screen is typically a screen in which an image in which a decorative symbol is completely stopped and displayed at the end of the notification effect is taken over and displayed, but indicates that the notification effect is not executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this typical example. In addition, when the post-emergency special effect is executed at the end of the notification effect, the display screen in the state where the post-emergency special effect is paused is taken over and displayed. Production sound output is stopped. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S708.

  In step S <b> 708, the CPU 501 uses the counter function capable of measuring time used for control of displaying an image on the image display unit 6, and the elapsed time (more specifically, after receiving the customer waiting process start instruction). The counting of (elapsed time from the start of the display of the customer waiting screen) X is started. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S709.

  In step S709, the CPU 501 determines whether or not a continuous effect (RTC effect or selection effect) is being displayed on the image display unit 6. If the determination in step S709 is YES, the process proceeds to step S710, and if this determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S716.

  In step S710, the CPU 501 determines whether or not it is the end timing of the continuous effect. Specifically, the CPU 501 determines whether it is the end timing of the RTC effect. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the selection effect in the probability variation game state is not ended (there is no end timing) among the continuous effects, but the continuous effect is a predetermined time (for example, 120 seconds) when the customer waits. It is good also as what complete | finishes in progress. If the determination in step S710 is yes, the process moves to step S711. If the determination is no, the process moves to step S714.

  In step S <b> 711, the CPU 501 resets the count of the elapsed time P after the continuous effect is executed in the customer waiting state to 0 second, and stops the counting operation of P. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S712.

  In step S712, the CPU 501 starts displaying the customer waiting screen on the image display unit 6. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S713.

  In step S713, the CPU 501 starts counting the elapsed time X since the display of the customer waiting screen is started, using a counter function capable of measuring time used for control for displaying an image on the image display unit 6, and the like. . Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S716.

  In step S714, the CPU 501 determines whether or not the elapsed time P has reached a predetermined time (30 seconds in the present embodiment). That is, the CPU 501 determines whether or not the continuous effect has been executed for 30 seconds in the customer waiting state. If the determination in step S714 is yes, the process proceeds to step S715. If the determination is no, the process proceeds to step S716.

  In step S715, CPU 501 changes the volume level of the effect sound for the continuous effect. Specifically, the RAM 503 stores, for example, any one of the volume levels 1 to 10 as the set volume level. For example, when there is no change operation by the player, the initial level 5 is stored as the set volume level. When a change operation is performed by the player, the changed level (for example, level 7) is stored as the set volume level (see step S7209 in FIG. 49 described later). The CPU 501 sets the RAM 503, for example, by lowering the set volume level set in the RAM 503 by 2 levels, for example, as a customer waiting volume level, or sets a fixed volume level (for example, volume level 1) regardless of the set volume level. The waiting volume level is set in the RAM 503. Then, the CPU 501 outputs the continuation effect by outputting it at a volume level of the newly set customer waiting volume level as the effect sound of the continuation effect. As a result, the volume of the effect sound of the continuation effect is changed when 30 seconds have elapsed since the continuation effect was executed in the customer waiting state. The changed volume level may be any value, for example, the volume level may be 0 (that is, mute). In addition, when the volume level of the continuous performance currently being executed is the customer waiting volume level, when the customer waiting state is not reached (that is, when a change in a new special symbol is started), the CPU 501 waits for the customer. The medium volume level is cleared, and the continuous effect is executed with the volume of the set volume level set in the RAM 503. Thereby, when the variation of a new special symbol is started, a normal (original) volume effect sound is output again. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S716.

  In step S716, the CPU 501 determines whether it is the start timing of the RTC effect (first RTC effect, second RTC effect, replacement effect). If the determination in step S716 is yes, the process proceeds to step S717. If the determination is no, the process proceeds to step S719. In addition, when it becomes a customer waiting state in the probability variation gaming state or the short-time gaming state, it is not determined as the start timing of the second RTC effect (see FIG. 33).

  In step S717, the CPU 501 ends the display of the screen that has been executed in the image display unit 6, and switches and displays the screen so that the RTC effect is executed in the image display unit 6. The RTC effect in the image display unit 6 is executed by the RTC effect execution process shown in FIG. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S718.

  In step S718, the CPU 501 uses a counter function capable of measuring time used for control of displaying an image on the image display unit 6 and the like, and a continuous effect (in this case, an RTC effect) is executed in a customer waiting state. The elapsed time P is counted. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S719.

  In step S719, the CPU 501 executes the waiting for customer switching process, ends the waiting for customer process, and repeatedly executes the process shown in FIG. 48 again at the timing of the next timer interrupt process. The details of this waiting-waiting switching process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  As described above, in the above-described customer waiting process, if the post-impact dedicated effect is executed before entering the customer wait state, the post-impact dedicated effect is in a pause state, and the pause state The screen is displayed as a customer waiting screen. Note that this post-impact dedicated effect is resumed by the process of step S9048 shown in FIG. 51 described later. In addition, when 30 seconds have elapsed since entering the customer waiting state, the sound level of the continuous effect (RTC effect or selection effect) that has been executed so far is output with the volume level changed (for example, the sound volume is reduced). Is done. As described above, the volume of the continuation effect is changed when 30 seconds elapse after entering the customer waiting state, but is changed at the same time as the customer waiting state is reached without elapse of 30 seconds. It may be a thing.

[Waiting for customer switching]
Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the customer waiting switching process by the image sound control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 49 is a detailed flowchart showing an example of the customer waiting switching process in step S719 of FIG.

  In step S7191 of FIG. 49, the CPU 501 determines whether or not the customer waiting screen is being displayed on the image display unit 6 or a continuous effect is being displayed. If the determination in step S7191 is YES, the process moves to step S7192, and if this determination is NO, the process moves to step S7196.

  In step S7192, the CPU 501 determines whether a TOP menu switching operation has been performed. Here, the TOP menu switching operation refers to a predetermined operation on the effect button 37 instructing switching to a TOP menu screen, which will be described later, and in the present embodiment, the image display unit 6 is displaying a customer waiting screen, When a predetermined operation is performed on the effect button 37 during display of a demonstration effect screen, which will be described later, switching to the TOP menu screen is performed. In the present embodiment, only the TOP menu switching operation can be performed as the button operation of the effect button 37 when the customer waiting screen is being displayed, the continuous effect is being displayed, and the demonstration effect screen is being displayed. . In these cases, however, the operation of the effect key 38 is possible (see steps S7207 to S7209 described later). If the determination in step S7192 is YES, the process moves to step S7194, and if this determination is NO, the process moves to step S7193.

  In step S 7193, the CPU 501 determines whether or not the elapsed time X after receiving the counted customer waiting process start instruction has reached a predetermined time (60 seconds in this embodiment). That is, it is determined whether or not a period during which no operation is performed for 60 seconds after the customer waiting process is started. If the determination in step S7193 is YES, the process proceeds to step S7195, and if this determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S7196.

  In step S7194, the CPU 501 counts the elapsed time counted from among the elapsed time X after receiving the customer waiting process start instruction and the elapsed time P after the continuous effect is executed in the customer waiting state. Reset to seconds and stop counting. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S7195.

  In step S7195, the CPU 501 starts displaying the TOP menu screen in the image display unit 6 and starts counting the execution time Y of displaying the menu screen using a counter function capable of measuring time. The processing moves to step S7196. Here, the TOP menu screen is a screen on which a menu selection screen including a plurality of menu items (for example, “character selection” menu and “actual machine customization” menu) is displayed. Here, the menu selection screen corresponds to the menu item by the player operating the effect key 38 to select any menu item and operating the effect button 37 to determine the menu item. This screen suggests that you can move to the submenu screen. In this embodiment, by determining one of the menu items from the TOP menu screen, the sub menu screen corresponding to the menu item is displayed. In the following, the TOP menu screen and the sub menu screen are collectively displayed. It will be simply referred to as a menu screen. As described above, in the present embodiment, there is a TOP menu switching operation during the display of the customer waiting screen or the continuous effect, or the customer waiting process start instruction is received (that is, the customer waiting screen is displayed). )) When a period during which no operation is performed continues for a predetermined time (60 seconds), the display is switched to the TOP menu screen.

  In step S7196, the CPU 501 determines whether the menu screen is being displayed on the image display unit 6. If the determination in step S7196 is YES, the process moves to step S7197. If this determination is NO, the process moves to step S7200. In the present embodiment, as the customer waiting process, the image display unit 6 displays any one of a customer waiting screen, a continuation effect, a menu screen, and a demonstration effect screen described later. Therefore, if the determination in step S7191 is NO and the determination in step S7196 is NO, the demonstration display screen is displayed on the image display unit 6.

  In step S7197, the CPU 501 determines whether or not a menu operation such as a menu item selection operation using the effect key 38 or a menu item determination operation using the effect button 37 has been performed on the menu screen. If the determination in step S7197 is YES, the process moves to step S7198, and if this determination is NO, the process moves to step S7200.

  In step S7198, CPU 501 displays a predetermined corresponding screen corresponding to the menu operation. For example, when a “return” operation is performed on the TOP menu screen, the TOP menu screen is displayed. When a “decision” operation is performed on the character, a notification screen indicating that the character has been determined is displayed. indicate. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S7199.

  In step S7199, the CPU 501 resets the count of the menu screen display execution time Y to 0 seconds, and restarts the Y count operation. If the count of the elapsed time X since the start of the customer waiting process is not reset, it is reset to 0 seconds and the X counting operation is stopped. Thereafter, the processing moves to step S7200.

  In step S7200, the CPU 501 determines whether the elapsed time X after receiving the counted customer waiting process start instruction has reached a predetermined time (90 seconds in this embodiment), or executes the counted menu display. It is determined whether or not the time Y has reached a predetermined time (90 seconds in this embodiment). That is, a period in which no operation is performed for 90 seconds after receiving an instruction to start the customer waiting process (after the customer waiting screen is displayed), or a menu screen is displayed without any operation being performed. It is determined whether or not a certain period is continued for 90 seconds. If the determination in step S7200 is YES, the process moves to step S7201. If the determination is NO, the process moves to step S7203.

  In step S7201, the CPU 501 starts displaying a demonstration effect screen on the image display unit 6, and then the process proceeds to step S7202. Here, the demonstration effect is, for example, an effect of displaying a video related to the content (animation, story, etc.) that is the subject of the gaming machine 1 for a predetermined time (for example, a playback time of 60 seconds). The effect suggests that the game has been interrupted or ended, and the occurrence of image sticking (ghost image) on the image display unit 6 is prevented. As described above, in this embodiment, when a menu operation is performed, the count of the menu screen display execution time Y is reset to 0 seconds, and the count is restarted from 0 seconds (see step S7199). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the time during which the menu operation is not performed during the display of the menu screen continues for a predetermined time (90 seconds) (that is, the no-operation period reaches the predetermined time), or the customer waiting screen is displayed. When a period during which no operation is performed for a predetermined time (90 seconds) continues, the display is switched to the demonstration effect screen.

  In step S7202, the CPU 501 starts counting the execution time Z for displaying the demonstration effect screen by using a counter function capable of measuring time, and resets the count for the execution time Y for displaying the menu screen to 0 seconds. , Y count operation is stopped or the count of the elapsed time X since the start of the customer waiting process is not reset (that is, YES in step S7193 and NO in step S7197). Resets to 0 seconds and stops the X counting operation. Thereafter, processing proceeds to step S7203.

  In step S7203, the CPU 501 determines whether or not there has been a TOP menu switching operation during display of the demonstration effect screen. As described above, in this embodiment, only the TOP menu switching operation can be performed as the button operation of the effect button 37 while the demonstration effect screen is displayed. If the determination in step S7203 is YES, the process moves to step S7205. If the determination is NO, the process moves to step S7204.

  In step S7204, the CPU 501 determines whether or not the counted execution time Z of the demonstration effect screen has reached a predetermined time (60 seconds in the present embodiment). That is, it is determined whether or not the demonstration effect screen is continuously displayed for 60 seconds. If the determination in step S7204 is YES, the process moves to step S7205. If this determination is NO, the process moves to step S7207.

  In step S7205, the CPU 501 starts displaying the TOP menu screen on the image display unit 6, and then the process proceeds to step S7206. That is, in this embodiment, when there is a TOP menu switching operation during the display of the demonstration effect screen, or when the display time of the demonstration effect screen reaches a predetermined time (60 seconds), the display is switched to the TOP menu screen. In this embodiment, when the display time of the demonstration effect screen reaches a predetermined time (60 seconds), the display is switched to the TOP menu screen, but may be switched to the customer waiting screen.

  In step S7206, the CPU 501 starts counting the execution time Y of the menu screen display using the counter function capable of measuring time, and resets the count of the execution time Z of the display of the demonstration effect screen to 0 seconds. , Z count operation is stopped. Thereafter, processing proceeds to step S7207.

  In step S <b> 7207, the CPU 501 determines whether a screen other than the menu screen (that is, a customer waiting screen, a continuous effect screen, a demonstration effect screen) is being displayed on the image display unit 6. If the determination in step S7207 is YES, the process proceeds to step S7208. If this determination is NO, the customer waiting switching process ends, and the process illustrated in FIG. 48 is repeated again at the timing of the next timer interrupt process. Run.

  In step S7208, the CPU 501 determines whether or not the left and right keys of the effect key 38 have been operated. If the determination in step S7208 is YES, the process proceeds to step S7209. If the determination is NO, the customer waiting switching process ends, and the process illustrated in FIG. 48 is repeated again at the timing of the next timer interrupt process. Run.

  In step S7209, the CPU 501 changes the set volume level according to the operation of the left and right keys of the effect key 38. Specifically, every time the left key of the production key 38 is pressed once, the CPU 501 decreases the volume level by one level until reaching the minimum level (for example, one level), and every time the right key is pressed once. The level is increased by one level until reaching the maximum level (for example, 10 levels), and the volume level is stored in the RAM 503 as a set volume level. Thereby, when the production sound is output by the image sound control unit 500, the volume of the production sound is output at the set volume level stored in the RAM 503. Then, the customer waiting switching process ends, and the process shown in FIG. 48 is repeatedly executed again at the timing of the next timer interrupt process.

  In the above description, it is assumed that the TOP menu switching operation can be performed even when the continuous effect is being executed and the TOP menu screen is switched. However, when the continuous effect is being executed, the TOP menu is switched. The menu switching operation cannot be performed, and switching to the TOP menu screen may not be performed. In the above description, the set volume level can be changed using the left and right keys of the effect key 38 when the menu screen is not displayed, but the left and right keys of the effect key 38 are also displayed when the menu screen is displayed. The set volume level may be changed using. A menu screen for changing the set volume level may be displayed.

[Direction execution process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 50, an effect execution process executed by the CPU 501 of the image sound control unit 500 based on a notification effect execution instruction from the effect control unit 400 will be described.

  In step S901 of FIG. 50, the CPU 501 of the image sound control unit 500 determines whether or not a notification effect execution instruction has been received from the effect control unit 400. If the determination in step S901 is YES, the process moves to step S902. If the determination is NO, the process moves to step S903.

  In step S902, the CPU 501 sets the production state based on the production state and the content of the production set according to the notification production execution instruction received in step S901, such as the execution timing and execution time of the configured preview production. Set the production schedule. In addition, by setting the production state, the production content of the non-interactive production (exclusive post-impact production, selection production in the probability variation gaming state) described later is set, and the production schedule is set, thereby the variation production described later. The production contents (selected theater reach production, partial theater reach production, development judgment production, pseudo-continuous production, fluctuation production after sudden impact, fluctuation production during probability change, and RTC compatible fluctuation production) are set. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S903.

  In step S903, the CPU 501 determines whether or not an effect state is set by the process of step S902. If the determination in step S903 is YES, the process moves to step S904. If the determination is NO, the process moves to step S905.

  In step S <b> 904, the CPU 501 performs an unlinked effect execution process for executing the after-impact dedicated effect in the short-time game state after winning the emergency hit and the selected effect in the probability variation game state. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S904. As will be apparent from the description below, the selection effect in the probability variation gaming state is an effect that is executed without being linked to the notification effect (fluctuation effect) that is executed in accordance with the change display of the special symbol. The after-hours-only effects are effects that are executed without being linked to the notification effects (fluctuation effects) that are executed in conjunction with the change display of the special symbol at the time of losing. To do. Note that the post-impact dedicated effect is linked to the notification effect (variation effect) that is executed in accordance with the change display of the special symbol at the time of a hit. Details of this non-interactive production execution process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S905, the CPU 501 determines whether or not an effect is scheduled by the process in step S902. If the determination in step S905 is YES, the process proceeds to step S906. If this determination is NO, the effect execution process ends, and the process illustrated in FIG. 50 is repeatedly performed again at the timing of the next timer interrupt process.

  In step S <b> 906, the CPU 501 performs a variation effect execution process for executing a variation effect that is executed in accordance with the variation display of the special symbol. Details of this variation effect execution process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Non-interactive production execution processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the unlinked effect execution process by the image sound control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 51 is a detailed flowchart showing an example of the unlinked effect execution process in step S904 of FIG.

  In step S9041 in FIG. 51, the CPU 501 determines whether or not the effect state set by the process in step S902 in FIG. If the determination in step S9041 is YES, the process moves to step S9042, and if this determination is NO, the process moves to step S9046.

  In step S9042, the CPU 501 determines whether or not the button determination operation has been performed within a predetermined time (for example, 8.0 seconds) in which the button operation can be performed. If the determination in step S9042 is YES, the process moves to step S9043. If the determination is NO, the process moves to step S9044. Although the description has been simplified, at this time, the CPU 501 displays a screen for selecting a plurality of replacement update effects on the image display unit 6 so that a replacement update effect can be selected by a button determination operation (described later). (See (1) in FIG. 74).

  In step S9043, the CPU 501 sets one of the five replacement update effects in the RAM 503 according to the button determination operation. Thereafter, processing proceeds to step S9044.

  In step S9044, the CPU 501 determines whether or not a specified time (for example, 8.0 seconds from the start of fluctuation) that allows the above button operation has elapsed. If the determination in step S9044 is YES, the process proceeds to step S9045. If this determination is NO, the unlinked effect execution process ends, and the process illustrated in FIG. 50 is repeatedly performed again at the timing of the next timer interrupt process. To do.

  In step S9045, the CPU 501 sets the replacement update effect set in the RAM 503 as a post-impact dedicated effect, and starts the post-impact dedicated effect on the image display unit 6. Then, the unlinked effect execution process ends, and the process shown in FIG. 50 is repeatedly executed again at the timing of the next timer interrupt process. As described above, in this embodiment, the post-impact dedicated effect is selected by the player from the replacement update effect (that is, the category A theater effect). Although details will become clear from the description below, this post-impact dedicated effect (ie, the theater effect for category A) is an effect with a total length of 60 seconds (see (1) in FIG. 67 described later). It starts when a specified time (8.0 seconds) has elapsed from the start of fluctuation in the first rotation in the short-time game state after the big hit (that is, displayed on the image display unit 6). It should be noted that the player can select a dedicated effect after a collision using 8.0 seconds from the start of the first rotation. In addition, as will be apparent from the following description, the special effect after the 60-second collision is a sudden change from the currently set replacement update effect in the first-turn variation display in the short game state after the big hit. 30 time-short games when a specified time (8.0 seconds from the start of fluctuation; hereinafter referred to as a selection time) that allows button operation to select a dedicated effect after the hour has elapsed It ends when the state ends (see (1) of FIG. 73 described later). In the present embodiment, in this way, in the first-turn variation display in the short-time gaming state after the big hit, a selection time is provided so that a button operation for selecting the post-impact dedicated effect is possible. However, this selection time may be provided during the round-off effect of a sudden hit. In this case, the replacement update effect set in the RAM 503 during this round effect is started and started as the first rotation change display in the short-time gaming state after the crash big hit as a dedicated effect after the crash. (That is, displayed on the image display unit 6). In this case, since it is not necessary to provide the selection time (8.0 seconds) in the fluctuation display of the first rotation, the fluctuation pattern of the first rotation shown in FIG. The number may be “60.00 seconds”, which is the same as “2-6 times”, and in the case of loss, the rotation number may be 1.50 seconds, which is the same as “2-30 times”.

  In step S9046, the CPU 501 determines whether or not the effect state set by the process of step S902 in FIG. If the determination in step S9046 is YES, the process proceeds to step S9047, and if this determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S9050.

  In step S9047, the CPU 501 determines whether or not the post-crash dedicated effect is being interrupted. If the determination in step S9047 is YES, the process moves to step S9048. If the determination is NO, the process moves to step S9049.

  In step S9048, the CPU 501 resumes the post-impact dedicated effect that was interrupted. Then, the unlinked effect execution process ends, and the process shown in FIG. 50 is repeatedly executed again at the timing of the next timer interrupt process.

  In step S <b> 9049, the CPU 501 continues the dedicated post-collision effect during execution. Then, the unlinked effect execution process ends, and the process shown in FIG. 50 is repeatedly executed again at the timing of the next timer interrupt process.

  In step S9050, the CPU 501 determines whether or not the effect state set by the process of step S902 in FIG. If the determination in step S9050 is YES, the process proceeds to step S9051, and if this determination is NO, the unlinked effect execution process ends, and the process shown in FIG. 50 is repeatedly executed again at the timing of the next timer interrupt process. To do.

  In step S9051, the CPU 501 continues to execute the selection effect (additional update effect) set in the RAM 503. Thereafter, processing proceeds to step S9052.

  In step S9052, the CPU 501 executes effect selection processing. Note that this effect selection process is the same as the process described with reference to FIG. By this process, in the production state 3 (that is, the probability variation game state), it is possible to set the production desired to view from the additional update production as the selection production. Then, the unlinked effect execution process ends, and the process shown in FIG. 50 is repeatedly executed again at the timing of the next timer interrupt process. It should be noted that the effect outline of the post-impact dedicated effect will be described later with reference to FIGS. 73 and 74, and the effect effect of the selected effect in the probability variation gaming state will be described later with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76.

[Variation production execution processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the variation effect execution process by the image sound control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 52 is a detailed flowchart showing an example of the variation effect execution process in step S906 of FIG.

  In step S9061 in FIG. 52, the CPU 501 determines whether or not the effect content scheduled by the process in step S902 in FIG. 50 includes the selected theater reach effect. Here, the selected theater reach effect is the SPSP reach effect (fourth SPSP reach effect) selected by the player from the replacement update effect (see FIG. 32) specified according to the time indicated by the RTC 404. This refers to the performance performed. The production outline of the selected theater reach production will be described later with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. If the determination in step S9061 is YES, the process moves to step S9062, and if this determination is NO, the process moves to step S9063.

  In step S9062, the CPU 501 executes the selected theater reach effect. The details of the selected theater reach production execution process will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S9063.

  In step S9063, the CPU 501 determines whether or not the effect content scheduled by the process of step S902 in FIG. 50 includes a partial theater reach effect. Here, the partial drama reach effect is an effect in which a part (for example, “A-4”) of the replacement update effect (see FIG. 32) specified according to the time indicated by the RTC 404 is executed as the SP reach effect. I mean. The production outline of the partial theater reach production will be described later with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. If the determination in step S9063 is YES, the process proceeds to step S9064, and if this determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S9065.

  In step S9064, the CPU 501 executes a partial theater reach effect. Details of the partial theater reach production execution process will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S9065.

  In step S9065, the CPU 501 includes whether or not the production content scheduled by the processing in step S902 in FIG. 50 includes an evolution determination production that involves a determination as to whether or not to develop into a subsequent production (continue). Determine. Specifically, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 69, the development determination effect is an effect with a total length of 80 seconds, and all of the development determination effects with a total length of 80 seconds (full version) are short-time games after a single big hit. It is used as a full special effect executed as the fourth SPSP reach effect in the state, and the first 30-second portion (short version) of the development determination effect with a total length of 80 seconds is the SP reach effect in the short-time game state after a single hit. It is used as a short special effect executed as Since the short special effect is the same as the first half part of the full special effect, the short special effect is executed at the time when the short special effect is started (that is, in the second half part). It is unknown whether the development determination effect is executed) or whether the full special effect is executed (that is, whether the development determination effect in the second half is executed). That is, when the full version or the short version of the development determination effect is executed, it is asked whether or not to develop into a subsequent effect. Note that the outline of the development determination effect (short special effect, full special effect) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70. If the determination in step S9065 is YES, the process moves to step S9066, and if this determination is NO, the process moves to step S9067.

  In step S9066, the CPU 501 executes the development determination effect. Details of this development determination effect execution process will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S9066.

  In step S9067, the CPU 501 determines whether or not the effect content scheduled by the process of step S902 in FIG. 50 includes a pseudo-continuous effect. Note that the outline of the effect of the pseudo-continuous effect will be described later with reference to FIGS. 71 and 72. If the determination in step S9067 is YES, the process proceeds to step S9068, and if this determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S9069.

  In step S9068, the CPU 501 executes a pseudo-continuous effect. Details of the pseudo-continuous effect execution process will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S9069.

  In step S9069, the CPU 501 performs a variation effect (hereinafter referred to as a variation effect after the sudden impact) when the effect content scheduled by the process of step S902 in FIG. It is determined whether or not it is included. An outline of the effect of the post-impact dedicated effect (and the post-impact variation effect) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 73 and 74. If the determination in step S9069 is YES, the process proceeds to step S9070, and if this determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S9071.

  In step S9070, the CPU 501 executes a post-impact variation effect. The details of the post-impact response effect execution process will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S9071.

  In step S9071, the CPU 501 performs a variation effect (hereinafter referred to as “variable effect during probability change”) when the selected effect in the probability variation gaming state in which the effect content scheduled by the process of step S902 in FIG. It is determined whether or not it is included. The outline of the selection effect in the probability variation gaming state (and the variation effect during probability variation) will be described later with reference to FIGS. If the determination in step S9071 is YES, the process proceeds to step S9072, and if this determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S9073.

  In step S9072, the CPU 501 executes a variation effect during probability change. The details of the process of executing the variation effect during probability change will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S9073.

  In step S9073, the CPU 501 determines whether or not the effect content scheduled by the process of step S902 in FIG. 50 includes an RTC-compatible variable effect corresponding to the RTC effect. Note that the outline of the RTC effect (and the RTC-compatible effect) will be described later with reference to FIGS. If the determination in step S9073 is YES, the process proceeds to step S9074. If this determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S9075.

  In step S9074, the CPU 501 executes the RTC compatible variation effect. Details of this RTC-compatible variation effect execution process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, the variation effect execution process ends, and the process shown in FIG. 50 is repeatedly executed again at the timing of the next timer interrupt process.

  In step S9075, the CPU 501 executes other effects other than the effects described above. Specifically, in the image display unit 6, the CPU 501 executes effects of other effects that are scheduled by the process of step S902 in FIG. 50 at the execution timing that is scheduled. Then, the variation effect execution process ends, and the process shown in FIG. 50 is repeatedly executed again at the timing of the next timer interrupt process.

[Selected theater reach production execution processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the selected theater reach production execution process by the image sound control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 53 is a detailed flowchart showing an example of the selected theater reach production execution process in step S9062 of FIG.

  In step S1401 of FIG. 53, the CPU 501 determines whether or not it is the start timing of the variable display of the decorative symbol DI (see (1) of FIG. 68 described later) scheduled by the process of step S902 of FIG. . If the determination in step S1401 is YES, the process moves to step S1402. If the determination is NO, the process moves to step S1403.

  In step S1402, the CPU 501 starts variable display of the decorative symbol DI. Specifically, the CPU 501 causes the appearance (numerical symbol) to be displayed in a transitional manner by scrolling and displaying each decorative symbol DI in the vertical direction on the image display unit 6. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1403.

  In step S1403, the CPU 501 determines whether or not it is the chance eye establishment timing of the decorative symbol DI during variable display, which is scheduled by the processing in step S902 of FIG. Note that “chance eye establishment” means that the three decorative symbols DI are temporarily stopped and displayed in specific symbol patterns (in this embodiment, “1”, “2”, “3”; see FIG. 68 (2B)). When the chance is established, it is suggested that the subsequent stage (development stage) develops. However, in the selected theater reach stage execution process, the selected stage reach stage stage is executed as this development stage. If the determination in step S1403 is YES, the process moves to step S1404. If the determination is NO, the process moves to step S1405.

  In step S1404, the CPU 501 causes the decorative symbol DI to be temporarily stopped and displayed with a chance. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1405.

  In step S1405, the CPU 501 determines whether or not it is a period of theater effect selection scheduled by the process in step S902 of FIG. The period for selecting a theater effect indicates a period during which the player can select a theater effect to be executed as the selected theater reach effect before the above-described selected theater reach effect is executed. If the determination in step S1405 is YES, the process moves to step S1406. If the determination is NO, the process moves to step S1407.

  In step S1406, the CPU 501 displays a reach selection screen (see (3) of FIG. 68 described later) for selecting a theater effect to be executed as the selected theater reach effect. The theater effects that can be selected on this reach selection screen are the replacement update effects specified according to the time indicated by the RTC 404 (for example, if the phase of category A is 7, theater effects “A-3” to “A-”). 7 ").

  In step S1407, the CPU 501 determines whether or not there has been a player's operation (operation for selecting a theater effect) on the effect button 37 within a predetermined period. If the determination in step S1407 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1408, and if this determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S1409.

  In step S1408, the CPU 501 sets the selected theater effect in the RAM 503 as the selected theater reach effect. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1410.

  In step S1409, the CPU 501 sets an initial effect (for example, the oldest updated drama effect among replacement update effects; for example, “A-3”) in the RAM 503 as the selected play reach effect. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1410.

  In step S <b> 1410, the CPU 501 determines whether it is the start timing of the selected theater reach effect scheduled by the process of step S <b> 902 in FIG. 50. If the determination in step S1410 is YES, the process moves to step S1411. If the determination is NO, the process moves to step S1412.

  In step S1411, the CPU 501 starts the theater effect set in the RAM 503 as the selected theater reach effect in the full version. Specifically, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 67, the theater effect (that is, the replacement update effect) set as the selected theater reach effect is a 60-second effect, and the CPU 501 The production is performed from the beginning to the end. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1412.

  In step S1412, the CPU 501 determines whether or not it is the symbol determination timing of the decorative symbol scheduled by the processing in step S902 in FIG. If the determination in step S1412 is YES, the process moves to step S1413. If the determination is NO, the process moves to step S9063 in FIG.

  In step S <b> 1413, the CPU 501 displays the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol DI, which is at least partially changing, with the big hit symbol or the lost symbol, notifies the big hit or the lost symbol, ends the selected theater reach production, and then performs the production control. By receiving the symbol confirmation command via the part 400, the symbol is displayed in a definite stop state with the jackpot symbol or the lost symbol. Specifically, in the image display unit 6, the CPU 501 uses all three decorative symbols DI as big hit symbols in the case of big hits, so-called double eyes (for example, “1”, “1”, “1” ) Temporarily stop display, and in the case of a loss, a temporary stop display is made at a so-called break pattern (for example, “1”, “2”, “1”), and then a fixed stop display is made. Then, the selected theater reach production execution process ends, and the process proceeds to step S9063 in FIG.

[Partial theater reach production execution processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the partial theater reach production execution processing by the image sound control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 54 is a detailed flowchart showing an example of the partial drama reach production execution process in step S9064 of FIG.

  In step S1501 of FIG. 54, the CPU 501 determines whether or not it is the start timing of the variable display of the decorative symbol DI (see (1) of FIG. 68 described later) scheduled by the processing of step S902 of FIG. . If the determination in step S1501 is YES, the process moves to step S1502, and if this determination is NO, the process moves to step S1503.

  In step S1502, the CPU 501 starts variable display of the decorative symbol DI. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1503.

  In step S1503, the CPU 501 determines whether or not it is the reach establishment timing of the decorative symbol DI during variable display, which is scheduled by the processing in step S902 of FIG. The reach eye formation means that two decorative symbols except for the last stopped decorative symbol out of the three decorative symbols DI have the same appearance (for example, “2”; see FIG. 68 (2A)). This indicates that the temporary stop display is indicated (so-called reach state is reached), and when the reach is established, it is suggested that the subsequent stage (development stage) develops. A partial theater reach production is executed. If the determination in step S1503 is YES, the process moves to step S1504. If the determination is NO, the process moves to step S1505.

  In step S1504, the CPU 501 causes the decorative symbols DI to be temporarily stopped and displayed at the reach. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1505.

  In step S1505, the CPU 501 determines whether it is the start timing of the partial drama reach effect scheduled by the process in step S902 of FIG. If the determination in step S1505 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1506, and if this determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S1507.

  In step S1506, the CPU 501 starts, as a short version, one drama effect (for example, “A-4”) determined from the replacement update effects specified according to the time indicated by the RTC 404 as the partial drama reach effect. . Specifically, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 67, the theater effect (that is, the replacement update effect) set as the partial theater reach effect is an effect with a total length of 60 seconds, but the CPU 501 has a total length of 60 seconds. Is performed from the middle (for example, 30 seconds after the start) to the end. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1507.

  In step S1507, the CPU 501 determines whether or not it is the symbol determination timing of the decorative symbol scheduled by the processing in step S902 in FIG. If the determination in step S1507 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1508, and if this determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S9063 in FIG.

  In step S1508, the CPU 501 displays a temporary stop display of the decorative symbol DI, at least a part of which is changing, as a big hit symbol or a lost symbol, thereby notifying the big hit or the lost symbol and ending the partial theater reach production. By receiving the symbol confirmation command via the part 400, the symbol is displayed in a fixed stop state with the big hit symbol or the lost symbol. Then, the partial drama reach production execution process ends, and the process proceeds to step S9065 of FIG.

[Development judgment effect execution processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the development determination effect execution process by the image sound control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 55 is a detailed flowchart showing an example of the development determination effect execution process in step S9066 of FIG.

  In step S1601 in FIG. 55, the CPU 501 determines whether or not it is the start timing of the variable display of the decorative symbol DI (see (1) in FIG. 70 described later) scheduled by the process in step S902 in FIG. . If the determination in step S1601 is YES, the process moves to step S1602, and if this determination is NO, the process moves to step S1603.

  In step S1602, the CPU 501 starts variable display of the decorative symbol DI. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1603.

  In step S1603, the CPU 501 determines whether or not it is the reach establishment timing of the decorative symbol DI during variable display, which is scheduled by the processing in step S902 in FIG. Note that, when the reach is established, it is suggested that the subsequent production (development production) develops. However, in the development determination production execution process, the development judgment production (short version short special production shown in FIG. Full version full special production) is executed. If the determination in step S1603 is YES, the process moves to step S1604. If the determination is NO, the process moves to step S1605.

  In step S1604, the CPU 501 causes the decorative design DI to be temporarily stopped and displayed at the reach. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1605.

  In step S1605, the CPU 501 determines whether or not it is the start timing of the development determination effect (short special effect or full special effect) set by the process in step S902 of FIG. If the determination in step S1605 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1606, and if this determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S1607.

  In step S1606, the CPU 501 starts a short special effect or a full special effect as the development determination effect. Specifically, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 69, the short special effect is the same as the first half of the full special effect, and thus any effect is executed when the development determination effect is started. I do not know if it is. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1607.

  In step S1607, the CPU 501 determines whether or not it is the development determination notification timing scheduled by the process in step S902 of FIG. Here, the development determination notification timing is a timing for notifying whether or not the development determination effect develops in the latter half (that is, whether the development determination effect being executed is a short version or a full version). The timing when the player operates the effect button 37 within a predetermined button operation effective period, or the operation when the player does not operate the effect button 37 within the operation effective period. This is the timing when the validity period has expired. If the determination in step S1607 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1608, and if this determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S1611.

  In step S1608, the CPU 501 determines whether the development determination effect being executed can be developed (that is, whether it is a full special effect). If the determination in step S1608 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1609, and if this determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S1610.

  In step S1609, the CPU 501 continues to execute the development determination effect being executed (that is, the full special effect). At this time, a continuation notification effect for notifying the continuation is executed by overwriting processing for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1611.

  In step S1610, CPU 501 ends the development determination effect being executed (that is, short special effect). More specifically, the short special effect is ended by replacing (or overwriting) the short special effect being executed with a notification effect that notifies the winning result. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1611. In the process of step S1607, the timing at which YES is determined in step S1607 differs depending on the timing at which the player operates the effect button 37 (or not), so the difference in timing is adjusted. For this reason, a predetermined grace period (time for adjusting the production scale) may be provided before the development determination effect being executed is terminated (it is replaced with a notification effect for notifying the winner). For example, the development determination effect is assumed to be a still screen in which the progress of the effect is paused during a predetermined button operation effective period, and until the button operation effective period expires after the operation of the effect button 37 is performed. In this period (remaining time), for example, the production scale may be adjusted by displaying a blackout screen. Alternatively, when the determination effect being executed is ended at the timing when the effect button 37 is operated, the remaining time is adjusted by adjusting the time scale for temporarily stopping and displaying the decorative symbol DI thereafter. It may be a thing. Similarly, in the process of step S1609, the remaining time may be adjusted. During the button operation effective period, the still screen is displayed as the development determination effect, and the effect button 37 is operated. The stationary screen is switched at the same timing, the continuous notification effect is executed, and the development determination effect proceeds, and the remaining time is adjusted by adjusting the time scale for temporarily stopping and displaying the decorative pattern DI thereafter It is good.

  In step S <b> 1611, the CPU 501 determines whether or not it is the decorative symbol determination timing (that is, the result notification timing for notifying the jackpot result) scheduled by the processing of step S <b> 902 in FIG. 50. If the determination in step S1611 is YES, the process moves to step S1612. If the determination is NO, the process moves to step S9067 in FIG.

  In step S <b> 1612, the CPU 501 displays the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol DI, at least a part of which is fluctuating, as a big hit symbol or a lost symbol, thereby notifying the big hit or lost and ending the development determination effect. When the symbol confirmation command is received via 400, the symbol is stopped and displayed with the jackpot symbol or the lost symbol. Then, the development determination effect execution process ends, and the process proceeds to step S9067 in FIG.

[Pseudo rendition execution processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the pseudo-continuous effect execution processing by the image sound control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 56 is a detailed flowchart showing an example of the pseudo-continuous effect execution process in step S9068 of FIG.

  In step S1701 in FIG. 56, the CPU 501 displays the change display start timing (or temporarily stopped once) of the decorative symbol DI (see FIG. 72 (1) described later) set by the process in step S902 in FIG. It is determined whether or not the decorative symbol re-variable display start timing). If the determination in step S1701 is YES, the process moves to step S1702, and if this determination is NO, the process moves to step S1703.

  In step S1702, the CPU 501 starts the variation display (or re-variation display) of the decorative symbol DI. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1703.

  In step S1703, the CPU 501 displays a pseudo-symbol pattern (the central symbol) that is temporarily displayed as a temporary stop symbol among the decorative symbols DI that are displayed in a variable manner, which is scheduled by the processing in step S902 in FIG. In the form, “7” (see (2) in FIG. 72)), it is determined whether or not it is the timing to display the temporary stop. In addition, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is suggested that the decorative symbol DI is variably displayed again. If the determination in step S1703 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1704, and if this determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S1705.

  In step S1704, the CPU 501 causes the decoration symbol DI to be temporarily stopped and displayed in a pseudo-continuous pattern. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1705.

  In step S1705, the CPU 501 determines whether or not it is the reach establishment timing of the decorative symbol DI during variable display, which is set by the process in step S902 of FIG. In addition, when reach reach is established, it is suggested that the more the number of pseudo-continuous symbols that have been temporarily stopped and displayed so far, the higher the possibility of developing to a subsequent effect (development effect). If the determination in step S1705 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1706, and if this determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S1707.

  In step S1706, the CPU 501 temporarily displays the decorative design DI with reach eyes. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1707.

  In step S1707, the CPU 501 determines whether it is the start timing of the development effect scheduled by the process in step S902 of FIG. If the determination in step S1707 is YES, the process moves to step S1708, and if this determination is NO, the process moves to step S1709.

  In step S1708, the CPU 501 starts the development effect. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1709.

  In step S1709, the CPU 501 determines whether or not it is the symbol determination timing of the decorative symbol scheduled by the processing in step S902 in FIG. If the determination in step S1709 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1710. If this determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S9069 in FIG.

  In step S1710, the CPU 501 displays a temporary hit display of the decorative symbol DI, at least a part of which is fluctuating, as a big hit symbol or a lost symbol, thereby notifying the big hit or lost and executing the development effect. The development effect is ended, and then the symbol confirmation command is received via the effect control unit 400, thereby confirming and stopping display with the jackpot symbol or the lost symbol. Then, the pseudo-continuous effect execution process ends, and the process proceeds to step S9069 in FIG.

  In the above-described pseudo-continuous effect execution process, the pseudo-continuous effect is executed by temporarily displaying the decorative symbol (the central symbol) that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol DI as the temporary continuous symbol. In addition to this example, in addition to this, the decorative symbol (the central symbol) that is displayed for temporary stop lastly is displayed as a temporary stop with a pseudo-continuous symbol. It is also possible to execute an effect (so-called quasi-continuous gaze effect) in which the loss is notified.

[Variation production execution process after a sudden collision]
Next, with reference to FIG. 57, the post-impact variation effect execution process by the image sound control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 57 is a detailed flowchart showing an example of the after-collision variation effect execution process in step S9070 of FIG.

  In step S1801 in FIG. 57, the CPU 501 determines whether or not it is the start timing of the variable display of the decorative symbol DI (see (1) in FIG. 74 described later) scheduled by the processing in step S902 in FIG. . If the determination in step S1801 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1802. If this determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S1803.

  In step S1802, the CPU 501 reduces the decorative symbol DI and starts displaying the change. Specifically, the CPU 501 displays a transition (numerical symbol) in the upper left corner of the image display unit 6 by scrolling and displaying each decorative symbol DI displayed in a reduced size in the vertical direction. The reason that the decorative symbol DI is reduced and displayed on the image display unit 6 in this way is that it does not interfere with the post-impact dedicated effect displayed on the image display unit 6 in the unlinked effect execution process shown in FIG. (See (2) in FIG. 74). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1803.

  In step S1803, the CPU 501 determines whether or not the post-collision variation effect being executed is an effect corresponding to a big hit. If the determination in step S1803 is YES, the process moves to step S1804. If the determination is NO, the process moves to step S1808.

  In step S1804, the CPU 501 determines whether or not it is the pseudo stop timing of the decorative symbol DI set by the process in step S902 of FIG. Here, the “pseudo stop” means that the decorative symbol DI temporarily stops at the losing eye and then starts the variable display again. By repeating this pseudo stop, the variation in one special symbol lottery is actually performed. In spite of the display, it can be visually recognized as if multiple special symbol lotteries have been executed. If the determination in step S1804 is YES, the process moves to step S1805, and if this determination is NO, the process moves to step S1806.

  In step S <b> 1805, the CPU 501 causes the decorative symbol DI to be temporarily stopped and displayed at the dismissal (losing symbol), and then starts the variable display again. Thereafter, processing proceeds to step S1806.

  In step S1806, the CPU 501 determines whether or not it is the jackpot notification timing scheduled by the process in step S902 of FIG. If the determination in step S1806 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1807, and if this determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S1808.

  In step S1807, the CPU 501 replaces (or overwrites) the post-impact dedicated effect displayed on the image display unit 6 in the unlinked effect execution process shown in FIG. To do. Specifically, the CPU 501 executes an effect for determining that the effect of the theater effect is “◯” in association with the post-impact dedicated effect (theatrical effect) that has already been executed as the jackpot notification effect (FIG. 74). (See (6)). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1808.

  In step S1808, the CPU 501 determines whether or not it is the decorative symbol determination timing of the decorative symbol scheduled by the process of step S902 in FIG. If the determination in step S1808 is YES, the process proceeds to step S1809, and if this determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S9071 in FIG.

  In step S1809, the CPU 501 notifies the big hit or the loss by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol DI that is at least partially changing with the big hit symbol or the lost symbol, and then receives the symbol confirmation command via the effect control unit 400. Is received, the display is confirmed and stopped with the jackpot symbol or the lost symbol. Then, the after-collision variation effect execution process ends, and the process proceeds to step S9071 in FIG.

[Variation production execution process during probability change]
Next, with reference to FIG. 58, the variation effect execution process during probability change by the image sound control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 57 is a detailed flowchart illustrating an example of the variation effect execution process during probability change in step S9072 of FIG.

  In step S1901 of FIG. 58, the CPU 501 determines whether or not it is the start timing of the variable display of the decorative symbol DI (see (1) of FIG. 76 described later) scheduled by the process of step S902 of FIG. . If the determination in step S1901 is YES, the process moves to step S1902, and if this determination is NO, the process moves to step S1903.

  In step S1902, the CPU 501 displays the decorative design DI in a reduced size, and starts its variable display. Specifically, the CPU 501 displays a transition (numerical symbol) in the upper left corner of the image display unit 6 by scrolling and displaying each decorative symbol DI displayed in a reduced size in the vertical direction. The reason that the decorative symbol DI is reduced and displayed on the image display unit 6 in this way is that the selection effect in the probability variation gaming state displayed on the image display unit 6 in the non-linked effect execution process shown in FIG. 51 is not disturbed. Yes (see (1) in FIG. 76). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1903.

  In step S1903, the CPU 501 determines whether or not it is the symbol determination timing of the decorative symbol scheduled by the processing in step S902 of FIG. 50 (that is, the result notification timing for notifying the jackpot result). If the determination in step S1808 is YES, the process moves to step S1904. If the determination is NO, the process moves to step S9073 in FIG.

  In step S 1904, the CPU 501 notifies the jackpot or the loss by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol DI, which is at least partially changing, with the jackpot or lose symbol, and then receives the symbol confirmation command via the effect control unit 400. Is received, the display is confirmed and stopped with the jackpot symbol or the lost symbol. Then, the variation effect execution process during probability change ends, and the process proceeds to step S9073 in FIG.

[RTC-compatible variation effect execution processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the RTC corresponding variation effect execution processing by the image sound control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 59 is a detailed flowchart showing an example of the RTC corresponding variation effect execution process in step S9074 of FIG.

  In step S2001 in FIG. 59, the CPU 501 starts the change display of the decorative symbol DI (see (2) in FIG. 62 and (2) in FIG. 64 described later) scheduled by the process in step S902 in FIG. Determine whether there is. If the determination in step S2001 is YES, the process moves to step S2002. If the determination is NO, the process moves to step S2003.

  In step S2002, the CPU 501 reduces and displays the decorative design DI and starts its variable display. Specifically, the CPU 501 displays a transition (numerical symbol) in the upper left corner of the image display unit 6 by scrolling and displaying each decorative symbol DI displayed in a reduced size in the vertical direction. The reason why the decorative design DI is reduced and displayed on the image display unit 6 in this way is that the RTC effect displayed on the image display unit 6 in the RTC effect execution process shown in FIG. 40 is not disturbed (FIG. 62). (See (2) and (2) of FIG. 64). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2003.

  In step S2003, the CPU 501 determines whether it is the start timing of the RTC-linked notice effect scheduled by the process in step S902 of FIG. Note that, as described above, the RTC-linked notice effect is an effect that can be executed when the second RTC effect is being executed in the image display unit 6, and in accordance with the contents of the second RTC effect, a variation pattern (RTC compatible) This is a notice effect that is executed a predetermined number of times according to the effect time of the variable effect, and specifically, an effect in which a game character that can acquire game points by defeating appears (see (3) in FIG. 64). . If the determination in step S2003 is YES, the process moves to step S2004. If the determination is NO, the process moves to step S2005.

  In step S2005, the CPU 501 determines whether or not the RTC corresponding variation effect being executed is an effect corresponding to the big hit. If the determination in step S2005 is YES, the process proceeds to step S2006, and if this determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S2008.

  In step S2006, the CPU 501 determines whether it is the jackpot notification timing scheduled by the processing in step S902 of FIG. If the determination in step S2006 is YES, the process proceeds to step S2007, and if this determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S2008.

  In step S2007, the CPU 501 executes a jackpot notification effect in the image display unit 6 by replacing (or overwriting) the RTC effect displayed on the image display unit 6 in the RTC effect execution process shown in FIG. Specifically, when the first RTC effect or the replacement effect is displayed on the image display unit 6, the CPU 501 congratulates the congratulation effect to notify the jackpot by replacing the end effect scheduled as the RTC effect (FIG. 62). (Refer to (5A)) or an extended effect (see (6) in FIG. 62) for notifying the jackpot after the end effect. On the other hand, when the second RTC effect is displayed on the image display unit 6, the CPU 501 replaces the end effect scheduled as the RTC effect and notifies the big hit (see (4A) in FIG. 64). And an extended game effect (see (5) in FIG. 64) for notifying the jackpot after the end effect. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2008.

  In step S2008, the CPU 501 determines whether or not it is the decorative symbol determination timing of the decorative symbol scheduled by the processing of step S902 in FIG. If the determination in step S2008 is YES, the process proceeds to step S2009. If this determination is NO, the process illustrated in FIG. 50 is repeatedly executed again at the timing of the next timer interrupt process.

  In step S2009, the CPU 501 notifies the big hit or the loss by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol DI, which is at least partially changing, with the big hit symbol or the lost symbol, and then receives the symbol confirmation command via the effect control unit 400. Is received, the display is confirmed and stopped with the jackpot symbol or the lost symbol. Then, the RTC-compatible variation effect execution process ends, and the process shown in FIG. 50 is repeatedly executed again at the timing of the next timer interrupt process.

  Above, description about the timer interruption process by the image sound control part 500 is complete | finished. Next, an outline of various effects that are realized in the present embodiment and realized by the timer interruption process by the image sound control unit 500 described above will be described.

[Outline of various productions]
[First RTC production / replacement production overview]
First, an overview of the first RTC effect and the replacement effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62. The first RTC effect and the replacement effect are realized mainly by timer interruption processing by the image sound control unit 500 shown in FIGS. 41, 48, and 59. Also, since the first RTC effect and the replacement effect differ only in the presence or absence of replacement notification, the replacement effect having replacement notification will be described as an example, and the description of the first RTC effect will be simplified. Here, as described above, the replacement effect is an effect indicating that a part of the theater effect has been updated to the latest one, but the first 30 seconds preparation effect and the latest effect have been updated. Announcement of the 60-second show production that shows the full 60-second theater production, the 10-second judgment production that determines whether or not it is a big hit in relation to the presentation production, and which theater production has been updated to the latest This is a series of effects consisting of a 10-second replacement notification and a 10-second end effect indicating that the replacement effect ends (see (1) in FIG. 61). In some cases, the effect time of the end effect is extended (see (5) in FIG. 61), or the extension effect is executed after the end effect ends (see (7) in FIG. 61). Hereinafter, a replacement effect at 20,000 (see FIG. 32) on Tuesday of the ninth day after operation will be specifically described.

  First, as shown in (1) of FIG. 61, for example, a case where the variation effect before the start of RTC is not executed at the timing when the RTC effect (replacement effect) is started, such as in a customer waiting state, will be described. To do. In this case, first, an effect for notifying that the RTC effect starts is executed as a preparation effect for 30 seconds on the entire screen of the image display unit 6 (see (1) in FIG. 62). Next, as the presentation effect, the latest updated theater effect (A-6 in this example) is executed for 60 seconds on the entire screen of the image display unit 6 (see (2) in FIG. 62). Next, as a determination effect, an effect suggesting whether or not it is a big hit by determining whether the effect content of the announcement effect was good (○) or bad (×) is executed on the entire screen of the image display unit 6 for 10 seconds. (See (3) in FIG. 62). Next, as the replacement notification, the latest updated theater production is shown (in this example, A-6 is updated among category A theater productions). It is executed for 10 seconds on the entire screen (see (4) in FIG. 62). Finally, as the end effect, the effect that notifies when the replacement effect ends and the next RTC effect is performed is executed for 10 seconds (see (5) in FIG. 62).

  Next, as shown in (2) to (4) of FIG. 61, when it is time to start the RTC effect (replacement effect), the changing effect is being executed (that is, the changing effect before the start of RTC is executed). The start of the RTC effect will be described. In this case, the preparation effect is formed by cutting out a part of the lower left region of the entire screen of the image display unit 6 so as not to disturb the variation effect before the start of the RTC already being executed in the image display unit 6. The wipe is displayed in the wipe area 6w (see (1A) in FIG. 62). When the pre-RTC variation effect is completed, the RTC effect (replacement effect) is switched from the wipe display to the full screen display and executed. Specifically, as shown in (2) of FIG. 61, when the pre-RTC variation effect (losing variation effect) ends during execution of the preparation effect, the screen is switched to the full screen from the middle of the preparation effect. On the other hand, as shown in (3) of FIG. 61, when the pre-RTC variation effect is not completed during the preparation effect, the subsequent presentation effect is also wiped in the wipe area 6w, and the pre-RTC variation effect ( The display is switched to the full screen display after the “losing fluctuation effect” is finished. When the RTC effect (replacement effect) is displayed on the full screen, the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed in the upper left corner as the RTC-compatible variable effect. On the other hand, as shown in (4) of FIG. 61, when it is time to start the RTC effect (replacement effect), if the changing effect before the start of RTC is a big hit, before the start of the RTC When the variation effect ends, the jackpot effect is started, so that the RTC effect (replacement effect) is continuously displayed in the wipe area 6w so as not to interfere with the jackpot effect. If the jackpot effect is being executed at the timing when the RTC effect (replacement effect) is started, the RTC effect (replacement effect) is continued until the jackpot effect is finished so as not to interfere with the jackpot effect. The wipe is displayed in the wipe area 6w.

  Next, as shown in (5) to (7) of FIG. 61, when it is time to end the RTC effect (replacement effect), the variable effect is being executed (that is, the RTC-compatible variable effect is being executed). ), The end of the RTC effect will be described. In this case, the RTC effect (replacement effect) ends in accordance with the end timing of the RTC corresponding variation effect already being executed in the image display unit 6. Specifically, as shown in (5) of FIG. 61, when the RTC corresponding variation effect being executed is lost, the execution time of the end effect is extended to the timing when the RTC correspondence variation effect ends. Thus, the RTC effect is ended at the timing when the RTC compatible variation effect ends. On the other hand, as shown in (6) of FIG. 61, when the RTC compatible variation effect started before the determination effect is a big hit, the determination effect indicating the big hit in the determination effect (the contents of the effect of the announcement effect are good) After the exchange notification is executed, the end effect is replaced with a congratulatory effect, and a congratulatory effect informing that it is a big hit until the timing when the RTC-compatible variable effect ends. This is executed (see (5A) in FIG. 62). On the other hand, as shown in (7) of FIG. 61, when the RTC corresponding variation effect started after the determination effect is a big hit, the determination effect indicating the loss in the determination effect (the effect content of the presentation effect is bad). After the end effect is finished, the extension effect indicating that the RTC-compatible variable effect is finished is executed until the timing when the RTC compatible effect is finished. It is notified (see (6) in FIG. 62). When the congratulation effect and the extension effect are finished, the RTC effect is finished and the jackpot effect is executed.

  In the first RTC effect, the replacement notification is not executed in the above-described replacement effect (for example, the end effect is executed instead of the replacement notification, or the time of the RTC effect is shortened by the time of the replacement notification). Is different. That is, the replacement notification indicating which theater effect has been updated is executed only at the third set time when the replacement effect is executed, and is not executed at the first set time.

[Outline of 2nd RTC production]
Next, an overview of the second RTC effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64. Note that the second RTC effect is realized mainly by timer interruption processing by the image sound control unit 500 shown in FIGS. 42, 48, and 59. As described above, the second RTC effect is a game effect, but the first 30 seconds of the preparation effect, and the player can acquire game points by operating the effect button 37 and the like for 80 seconds. This is a series of effects composed of a simultaneous game effect and a 10-second end effect indicating that the simultaneous game effect ends (see (1) in FIG. 63). In some cases, the effect time of the end effect is extended (see (5) in FIG. 63), or the extended game effect is executed after the end effect ends (see (7) in FIG. 63). . Hereinafter, the second RTC effect at 12:30 on a certain day will be specifically described.

  First, as shown in (1) of FIG. 63, for example, when the RTC effect before the start of the RTC is not executed at the timing when the RTC effect (second RTC effect) is started, as in the customer waiting state. explain. In this case, first, an effect for notifying that the RTC effect starts is executed as a preparation effect for 30 seconds on the entire screen of the image display unit 6 (see (1) in FIG. 64). Next, as a simultaneous game effect, for example, a rocket appears, and a game effect in which game points are acquired by damaging the rocket by a player hitting the effect button 37 or the like repeatedly is displayed on the image display unit 6. It is executed for 60 seconds on the screen (see (2) in FIG. 64). Next, the game points acquired in the simultaneous game effect are displayed as the end effect, and the second RTC effect is ended, and an effect for notifying when the next second RTC effect is performed is executed for 10 seconds ( (See (3) in FIG. 64). The acquired game points displayed at the time of the end effect do not reach the maximum value of 100 pt.

  Next, as shown in (2) to (4) of FIG. 63, when it is time to start the RTC effect (replacement effect), the changing effect is being executed (that is, the changing effect before starting the RTC is executed). The start of the RTC effect will be described. In this case, the preparation effect is formed by cutting out a part of the lower left region of the entire screen of the image display unit 6 so as not to disturb the variation effect before the start of the RTC already being executed in the image display unit 6. The wipe is displayed in the wipe area 6w (see (1A) in FIG. 64). However, when it is time to start the simultaneous game effect, the simultaneous game effect is displayed in full screen regardless of the end timing of the fluctuation effect before RTC start. More specifically, as shown in (2) of FIG. 63, when the pre-RTC variation effect (losing variation effect) ends during execution of the preparation effect, the display is switched to the full screen from the middle of the preparation effect. The simultaneous game production is displayed in full screen. On the other hand, as shown in (3) of FIG. 63, when the pre-RTC variation effect is not finished during execution of the preparation effect, the second RTC effect (preparation effect) is wiped in the wipe area 6w until the preparation effect is finished. Although displayed, when the simultaneous game effect is started, the simultaneous game effect is displayed in full screen even if the fluctuation effect before the start of the RTC has not ended. However, at this time, the simultaneous game effect is displayed semi-transparently, thereby preventing a variation effect (for example, SP reach) that has already been executed (for example, SP reach) from being hindered (see (2A) in FIG. 64). When the variation effect before the start of RTC ends, the display mode of the simultaneous game effect is switched from the translucent display to the normal display (see (2) in FIG. 64). When the RTC effect (second RTC effect) is normally displayed on the entire screen (normal display that is not semi-transparent display), the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed in the upper left corner as the RTC-compatible variable effect. . On the other hand, as shown in (4) of FIG. 63, when the RTC effect (second RTC effect) is started and the changing effect before the start of RTC is a big hit, The second RTC effect (preparation effect) is wiped and displayed in the wipe area 6w until it is finished, and then the simultaneous game effect is displayed in full screen in a semi-transparent display, but the second RTC effect ends when the big hit effect is started. . In the present embodiment, the second RTC effect is ended when the big hit effect is started. However, for example, the timing for notifying the big hit during the variable effect, for example, before the big hit effect is started (for example, The second RTC effect may be ended at the timing when the winning combination 7 is activated to notify the big hit.

  Next, as shown in (5) to (7) of FIG. 63, when it is time to end the RTC effect (second RTC effect), the change effect is being executed (that is, the RTC-compatible change effect is executed). The end of the RTC effect will be described. In this case, the RTC effect (second RTC effect) is ended in accordance with the end timing of the RTC corresponding variation effect already being executed in the image display unit 6. Specifically, as shown in (5) of FIG. 63, when the RTC corresponding variation effect being executed is lost, the execution time of the end effect is extended to the timing when the RTC corresponding variation effect ends. Thus, the RTC effect is ended at the timing when the RTC compatible variation effect ends. On the other hand, as shown in (6) of FIG. 63, when the RTC corresponding variation effect started before the end effect is a big hit, the end effect is replaced with the game clear effect, and the RTC corresponding variation effect is displayed. Until the end timing, a game clear effect that notifies that it is a big hit is executed (see (3A) in FIG. 46). In this game clear effect, it is displayed that the maximum value of 100 pt has been acquired as the game points acquired in the simultaneous game effect, thereby notifying that it is a big hit. On the other hand, as shown in (7) of FIG. 63, when the RTC corresponding variation effect started during the end effect is a big hit, it cannot be replaced with the game clear effect at the end effect time, so the end effect is After the end, the extended game effect is executed until the timing at which the RTC compatible effect is ended, and an effect that succeeds in the game (for example, defeats the enemy) is executed in the extended game effect. It is notified (see (4) in FIG. 64). When the game clear effect or the extended game effect ends, the RTC effect ends, and the jackpot effect is executed.

  By the way, as described above, in a plurality of gaming machines 1 (see FIG. 9) installed on one island in the pachinko hall, time information measured by each RTC 404 is synchronized. For this reason, simultaneous game effects are simultaneously executed on a plurality of gaming machines 1, and even if a pre-RTC start change effect (SP reach, etc.) is being executed, it is displayed semi-transparently and displayed in full screen. It is possible to create a sense of unity in which the game is started at the same time on the entire island made up of the gaming machines 1. Note that the simultaneous game effect may be executed at the same timing on a plurality of gaming machines installed on one island (that is, the rocket image shown in (2) of FIG. 64 is displayed at the same timing). Alternatively, based on the identification number of the gaming machine stored in the non-volatile RAM 504, by providing a time difference in the timing (ie, the timing at which the rocket image is displayed) started between adjacent gaming machines, It is also possible to create a sense of unity of the entire island by making it appear to move between adjacent gaming machines.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, as the RTC effects, a plurality of types of RTC effects (first RTC effect, second RTC effect, replacement update effect) are prepared, so that only one type of RTC effect is executed. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored as compared to the case. In addition, among the plurality of types of RTC effects, the first RTC effect and the replacement update effect are executed regardless of the gaming state, while the second RTC effect is restricted from being executed according to the gaming state (FIG. 33). reference). For this reason, an effect that notifies that a new theater effect has been updated, such as a replacement update effect, can be notified to the player in any gaming state, and, as in the second RTC effect, By limiting the execution of game effects that do not necessarily need to be notified to the player, it is possible to preferentially execute other game effects such as during a big hit. That is, in the present embodiment, an effective effect can be realized by executing and controlling a plurality of types of RTC effects according to the types.

[Round production overview]
Next, an outline of a round effect will be described with reference to FIG. The round effect is realized mainly by timer interruption processing by the image sound control unit 500 shown in FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 65, the round effect in the jackpot game executed when the jackpots A to D are won will be described.

  As shown in (1) of FIG. 65, when the jackpot game is executed when the jackpot A is won, in the round effects of the first to seventh rounds, the non-selected effects (for example, related to the theme of the gaming machine) A predetermined PV (promotion video) effect is executed, and the V round effect is executed at the 8th R which is the V round (VR). And while this V round effect is performed, the effect image of a non-selection effect (PV effect) is not displayed. Note that the effect sound of the non-selected effect may be output when the V round effect is being executed (for example, the sound level may be output with a reduced volume level).

  As shown in (2) of FIG. 65, when the jackpot game is executed in the case of winning the jackpot B, in the round effects of the 1R to 8R, non-selected effects (for example, in advance related to the theme of the gaming machine) A predetermined PV (promotion video) effect) is continuously executed.

  As shown in (3) of FIG. 65, when the jackpot game is executed in the case where the jackpot C is won, in the round effects of the 1R to 8R, it indicates a non-selected effect (for example, it is a sudden hit game). Dedicated production) is continuously executed.

  Next, the round effect during the big hit game when the big hit D is won will be described. When winning a big hit D, depending on whether it is a big hit from the normal gaming state (so-called first win) or a big hit from the short-time state (short-time gaming state or probability variable gaming state) (so-called continuous change per game) Different round effects are executed.

  As shown in (4) of FIG. 65, when the big hit game in the case where the big hit D is won from the normal game state, the non-selected effect (for example, the PV effect) is performed in the 1R to 7R round effects. Is executed, and the V-round effect is executed at the 8th R, which is the V-round (VR). And while this V round effect is performed, the effect image of a non-selection effect (PV effect) is not displayed. Then, in the 9R round effect, the display of the non-displayed effect image of the non-selected effect is resumed, and the non-selected effect is continued until the 16Rth effect. Note that while the V-round effect is being executed, the non-selected effect effect image is not displayed. For example, for the reason that the output of the non-selected effect effect sound is continued, the non-selected effect is V Even during a round effect, the effect is progressing (although the effect image is not actually drawn). For this reason, when the display of the effect image of the non-selected effect is resumed in the 9R round effect, an effect image that is intermittent from the effect image displayed immediately before the start of the 8Rth is displayed.

  As shown in (5) of FIG. 65, when the big hit game is executed in the case of winning the big hit D from the short-time state, the selection effect (the above-mentioned theater effect) is executed in the 1R to 7R round effects. Then, the V round effect is executed at the 8th R which is the V round (VR). While the V-round effect is being executed, the selected effect is temporarily stopped, and the output of the effect image and the effect sound of the selected effect is temporarily stopped. Then, in the 9R round effect, the output of the effect image and effect sound of the selection effect that has been temporarily stopped is resumed, and the selection effect is continued until the 16Rth effect. While the effect image and effect sound of the selected effect are not output while the V round effect is being executed, the temporarily stopped state of this output is stored in the RAM 503, and the output of the selected effect is performed in the 9R round effect. Is resumed from this paused state, the selection effect that is continuous with the selection effect that was executed immediately before the start of the 8th R is resumed. As a result, even if the execution of the selection effect selected by the player is restricted due to the execution of the V-round effect, a part of the selection effect is not dropped and is not executed. It is possible to adopt an effect having a series of flows as (that is, a theater effect).

  In the present embodiment, when the V-round effect is executed, the selection effect is paused. Even in this way, since the selection effect can be visually recognized even during the V-round effect, it is possible to entertain the player with a series of selection effects (theatrical effects) that are not interrupted throughout the round in the big hit game. .

[Outline of selection effects during a big hit]
Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the outline of the selection effect during the big hit game (selection of the selection effect and execution of the selection effect during the V round effect) will be described. This selection effect is realized mainly by timer interruption processing by the image sound control unit 500 shown in FIGS. The round effect shown in FIG. 66 shows a round effect (see (5) in FIG. 65) executed in the big hit game when winning the big hit D from the short-time state.

  As shown in (1) of FIG. 66, in the round effects of 1R to 7R, the selection effect is executed. However, when the player operates the left and right keys of the effect key 38, A direction selection screen is displayed. The effect selection screen has four boards that are slightly shifted from each other and overlap each other corresponding to each of the four categories A to D of the additional update effects, and the names of the additional update effects in the respective categories are provided on each board. Are arranged and displayed on the top and bottom. The display of these four boards suggests that there are multiple categories, and the name of the additional update effect in the category of the top board is displayed, so that multiple selections can be made within the category. It is suggested that the item exists. Further, since the effect selection screen has such a configuration, it is possible to display many selection items classified into categories even if the display area is small. The effect selection screen displays a cursor indicating which additional update effect is selected as the currently selected effect, and the name “A-4” of the theater effect is displayed in the cursor. This indicates that the theater effect “A-4” is currently being executed on the left side of the effect selection screen.

  As described above, when the up / down key of the effect key 38 is operated while the effect selection screen is displayed on the image display unit 6, the name of the additional update effect displayed in the cursor is displayed in a transitional manner, as shown in FIG. As shown in (2A), for example, a theater effect “A-5” is displayed. Then, the selection effect that has been executed on the left side of the effect selection screen is switched from the theater effect “A-4” to “A-5”, and when it switches, the theater effect “A-5” is newly executed as the selection effect. Be started.

  On the other hand, when the left and right keys of the production key 38 are operated while the production selection screen is displayed on the image display unit 6, the board surface of the production selection screen is switched (the board surface displayed at the top is switched). The category of the update effect is switched, and is switched to, for example, category B as shown in (2B) of FIG. At this time, the additional update effect (“B-4”) of the category after switching corresponding to the number of the additional update effect (“A-4”) displayed in the category before switching is displayed in the cursor. The name is displayed. Then, the selection effect that has been executed on the left side of the effect selection screen is switched from the theater effect “A-4” to “B-4”, and when it switches, the theater effect “B-4” is newly executed as the selection effect. Be started.

  The selection effect (for example, “A-5”) selected as described above is executed for a specified time (for example, 60 seconds), and when the selection effect is completed, the next is performed in accordance with the selection mode (for example, the sequential selection mode within category). The selection effect “A-6” is automatically selected and executed, and the execution of the selection effect is continued at the 1st to 7th eyes. Note that, as described in (2A) and (2B) of FIG. 66, the player can reselect the selected effect at any time during the execution of the selected effect. Then, as shown in (3) of FIG. 66, immediately before the start of 8R (V round), the theater effect “A-6” is executed as the selected effect, and the effect continues until the remaining “20 seconds”. Suppose you were doing.

  Next, as shown in (4) of FIG. 66, when 8R (V round) is started, the output of the selection effect is temporarily stopped in the image display unit 6, and the V round effect is executed instead. In this round, a notification image for notifying that a game ball is awarded to the V region 53 is displayed. If the effect selection screen is displayed on the image display unit 6 immediately before the start of 8R (V round) (see (3) in FIG. 66), the output of the selected effect is paused. The effect selection screen is not displayed.

  Then, as shown in (5) of FIG. 66, when the 9R round effect is started, the output of the selected effect is resumed, and the play effect “A-6” that has been proceeding until immediately before the start of 8R is The output is resumed from the state where the output is paused, that is, the theater effect “A-6” is resumed from the remaining “20 seconds”.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the player can select the effect to be executed as the selected effect from the additional update effects by operating the effect key 38 or the like, so that the round effect in the jackpot game is a game. It can be made an interesting production. In addition, since this additional update effect is additionally updated as the time indicated by the RTC 404 elapses (according to the phase update), the number of selection effects that the player can select increases. However, it is possible to maintain the interest of players who have played games. In addition, when the V round effect is executed, the output of this selection effect is limited (paused), but the output of the selection effect is resumed in the 9R round effect after the V round effect is finished. In this case, by resuming from the paused state, a part of the selected effects is not dropped and not executed. For this reason, by executing the V round effect, it is possible to appropriately notify that the V round is important for the player (which is a condition for providing a high-accuracy state), and the player selects All the effects can be shown to the player without omitting a part of the selected effects. In addition, since the selection effects displayed during the big hit game are not executed because some of the effects are omitted, a story effect or the like that is not suitable if interrupted can be used. It becomes possible.

  Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 75 and FIG. 76, but the selection effect selected during the big hit game round is after the big hit game (the big hit game when winning the big hit D) ends. It is continuously executed even in the probability variation gaming state.

[Selective theater reach production / partial theater reach production overview]
Next, with reference to FIG. 67 and FIG. 68, the outline of the selected theater reach effect and the partial theater reach effect will be described. The selected theater reach effect is realized mainly by the timer interrupt process by the image sound control unit 500 shown in FIG. 53, and the partial theater reach effect is realized mainly by the timer interrupt process by the image sound control unit 500 shown in FIG. Is done.

  First, the effects used as the selected theater reach production and the partial theater reach production will be described. As described above, the selected theater reach effect is an effect that can be selected by the player from the replacement update effect (see FIG. 32) specified according to the time indicated by the RTC 404. More specifically, for example, When the phase of the category A is updated to 7 according to the time indicated by the RTC 404, it is selected from the five replacement update effects “A-3” to “A-7”. Here, as shown in (1) of FIG. 67, the replacement update effect selected at this time (that is, the theater effect of category A) is an effect of a total length of 60 seconds, and the last two seconds are different for the lost use. It is an effect that has two versions for winning. The selected theater reach effect is executed from the beginning to the end (in the full version) according to whether the hit / loss is notified. That is, the full version of the theater production is used as the selected theater reach production. On the other hand, as described above, the partial theater reach production is a production in which any one of the five replacement update productions described above is executed, and when the category A phase is updated to 7, A part of “A-4” determined by lottery, for example, is executed from the five replacement update effects of effects “A-3” to “A-7”. More specifically, the partial theater reach direction is from halfway (30 seconds after the start) to the end of this 60-second full-length theater production (replacement and renewal production) depending on whether the hit / loss is reported. Executed (in short version). That is, a short version of the theater production is used as the partial theater reach production. In addition, as shown in (2) of FIG. 67, the partial theater reach production is performed for 30 seconds 10 seconds after the start of the variation when the type of the production pattern of the SP reach production with the variation time of 40 seconds is determined. As shown in (3) of FIG. 67, the selected theater reach production is 30 seconds after the start of the variation when the type of the production pattern of the fourth SPSP reach production with the variation time of 90 seconds is determined. This is a 60-second reach effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 68, the outline of the partial drama reach production and the selected drama reach production will be described. When the partial theater reach effect is executed, when the variation of the special symbol is started, the variation display of the decorative symbol DI is started on the image display unit 6 as shown in (1) of FIG. As shown in (2A), a reach (for example, “2”) is established at a predetermined timing (at the time when 10 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation). Then, as shown in (4A) of FIG. 68, a partial theater reach effect is started as a subsequent effect that develops upon the establishment of the reach, for example, the theater effect “A-4” is a short version of the replacement update effect. (From the time of the remaining 30 seconds out of the total length of 60 seconds), and then, as shown in FIG. 68 (5A), the short version of the theater production ends and the winning result (big hit / losing) is notified. (For example, in the case of a big hit, an effect for determining that the character is “◯” is displayed, and in the case of a loss, an effect for determining that the character is “×” is displayed).

  On the other hand, when the selected theater reach effect is executed, when the variation of the special symbol is started, the variation display of the decorative symbol DI is started on the image display unit 6 as shown in (1) of FIG. As shown in (2B) of FIG. 68, a chance (for example, “1”, “2”, “3”) is established at a predetermined timing (at the time when 10 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation). Then, an introduction effect for notifying that the reach selection screen is displayed when the chance eye is established is executed, and the decorative symbol DI temporarily stopped at the chance eye is changed again, and the upper left of the image display unit 6 is displayed. In a state of being reduced and displayed at the corners, the display is switched to reach eyes (for example, “1”). Then, as shown in (3) of FIG. 68, the reach selection screen is displayed on the image display unit 6, and is displayed as the reach effect from the replacement update effects (for example, “A-3” to “A-7”). The player is prompted to select an effect to be performed within the effective period. Then, the player selects the replacement update effect displayed on the reach selection screen using, for example, the up and down keys of the effect key 38 and presses the effect button 37 (decision operation), thereby selecting the selected replacement update effect. Is determined as a reach production. Specifically, when the up / down key of the production key 38 is operated, the cursor on the reach selection screen moves, indicating that the replacement update production with the cursor overlapped is the currently selected production, The replacement update effect in which the cursor is overlapped by the determination operation by 37 is determined as the reach effect. If there is no determination operation and the valid period has elapsed, the replacement update effect that overlaps the cursor when the valid period has elapsed may be determined as the reach effect, or the replacement selected by random lottery The update effect may be determined as the reach effect, or a predetermined replacement update effect (for example, the latest updated update effect) determined as the reach effect may be determined. Thus, when the player selects any replacement update effect as the reach effect, the replacement update effect is started as the selected theater reach effect. Specifically, for example, the theater effect “A- 4 ”is started in the full version (from the remaining 60 seconds out of the total length of 60 seconds), and then, as shown in (5B) of FIG. Loss) is reported. In the above, as an example of the opportunity for the selective theater reach production to be executed (or the reach selection screen is displayed), the establishment of the chance eye is a condition, but the establishment of the chance eye is not necessarily the execution of the selective theater reach production. (Or reach reach screen display) is not guaranteed. For example, there is an effect in which only a part of the introductory effect for notifying that the reach selection screen is displayed even if the chance eye is established is displayed, and the decorative symbol DI is stopped and displayed as it is at the chance time, and the loss is notified. May be executed.

  By the way, the theater effects of category A are specified as replacement update effects, and the theater effects of categories A to D are specified as additional update effects. Therefore, the theater effects of category A are replacement update effects and additional update effects. Identified. On the other hand, as described above, the additional update effect is selected by the player during the jackpot round, or is executed as a selection effect selected by the player in the probability variation game state, and is not linked to the variable effect. / It is not used to notify the loss. For this reason, when the theater effect of category A is used as the additional update effect, the lost version of the above-described two versions (win / los) is used. In addition, when the theater effect of category A is specified as a replacement update effect and is used as a dedicated effect after an emergency, since the effect is not linked with the change effect (more specifically, the effect is replaced at the time of big hit), the above-mentioned Of the two versions (win / miss), the lost version is used. Therefore, the winning version of the category A theater effect is used only when it is used as a reach effect (selective theater reach effect or partial theater reach effect) at the time of a big hit.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, although the same theatrical production is used, the part used is made different between the whole part from the first to the last part and the part from the middle part to the last part. It can be used for both (a selected theater reach production with a production scale of 60 seconds and a partial theater reach production with a production scale of 30 seconds). Therefore, the amount of data that needs to be stored in the ROM 502 as effect material can be reduced. Also, in general, when a single theater production is prepared as a production material, the climax of the theater production is often set in the latter half of the production scale. The climax of theatrical production is also executed in the reach production. For this reason, it becomes possible to entertain the player in both the selected theater reach production and the partial theater reach production.

  In the above, the same theatrical production is used differently for the part from the beginning to the end and the part from the middle to the end as the part to be used. It can be said that it is divided into two parts, a pattern using both the first half part and the second half part (selective play reach production) and a pattern using only the second half part (partial play reach production). However, the method of dividing the same theatrical production is not limited to the method of dividing the first half part and the second half part in this way. For example, the first part (introduction), the middle part (middle), the last part It may be divided into three (final). In this case, if the end part (end) is common as the end part of the theater production, a pattern using “Introduction, Middle, End”, a pattern using “Medium, End”, and “End” If the pattern used is conceivable and the middle part (medium) is common as the end part of the theatrical performance, a pattern using “Introduction, Medium” and “Medium” can be considered. In this way, as a pattern that shares the end part of the theatrical production, it is more than the case where the theatrical production is divided into two parts, the first half and the second half ("first half, second half" and "second half"). The production of the pattern can be realized. Also, since the same theater production is divided into three parts, it has a middle part (medium), so it ends when the production starts from “medium” (that is, when it does not start from “introduction”). The player can have a sense of expectation that it will develop into “the end” instead of doing it.

[Outline of development judgment production (short special production / full special production)]
Next, an overview of the development determination effect (short special effect and full special effect) will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70. The development determination effect is realized mainly by timer interruption processing by the image sound control unit 500 shown in FIG.

  First, the development determination effect used as the short special effect and the full special effect will be described. As shown in (1) of FIG. 69, the development determination effect is an effect of a total length of 80 seconds used in a short-time game state after a single big hit, and the last two seconds have two versions for lost and winning. It is a production that has. The full special effect is executed from the beginning to the end (in the full version) according to whether the hit / miss is notified. That is, the full version development determination effect is used as the full special effect. On the other hand, in the short special effect, a part of the development determination effect having a total length of 80 seconds is executed. More specifically, the short special effect is executed (in the short version) from the beginning of the development determination effect having a total length of 80 seconds to the middle (30 seconds after the start). That is, the short version development determination effect is used as the short special effect. Note that, as shown in FIG. 69 (2), the short special effect is a 30-second effect that is executed 10 seconds after the start of the change when the effect pattern type of the SP reach effect with a change time of 40 seconds is determined. As shown in (3) of FIG. 69, the full special reach effect is executed 10 seconds after the start of the change when the effect pattern type of the fourth SPSP reach effect with the change time of 90 seconds is determined. 80-second reach production. Then, at the development determination notification timing (for example, 38 seconds after the start of the fluctuation) before the end of the short special effect, a notification effect (that is, the effect is informed of the winning result depending on which of hit / losing is notified). (It can be said that it is a notification effect for notifying non-continuation)) (or overwritten). Also, even in the full special effect, at the same development determination notification timing (for example, 38 seconds after the start of fluctuation), the continuous notification effect for notifying that the effect is continued is overwritten and displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds). . That is, both the short special effect and the full special effect have the same development determination notification timing, and at this development determination notification timing, whether the effect is discontinuous (that is, whether it is a short special effect) or continued. Whether there is (that is, a full special effect) is notified.

  Next, an overview of the short special effect and the full special effect will be described with reference to FIG. When the short special effect and the full special effect are executed, in any case, when the change of the special symbol is started, as shown in (1) of FIG. Fluctuation display is started, and a reach (for example, “2”) is established at a predetermined timing (when 10 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation), as shown in FIG. Then, as shown in (3) of FIG. 70, the development determination effect (short special effect or full special effect) is started as a subsequent effect that develops upon the establishment of the reach eye. An effect of traveling toward the ground is executed. Then, as shown in (4) of FIG. 70, whether or not the development determination effect develops in the second half part at the development determination notification timing (for example, when the effect button 37 is pressed after 38 seconds from the start of fluctuation). The determination result is notified. For example, if a character straddling a motorcycle can determine whether or not it can break through the wall, and if the wall is broken at the timing when the direction button 37 is operated, it develops in the latter half, and if it cannot break through the wall, it develops in the second half do not do. Therefore, when the short special effect has been executed, as shown in (5A) of FIG. 70, the development determination effect ends without breaking through the wall (that is, the “losing” winning notification effect is replaced, for example). When the full special effect is being executed, the development effect is continued by breaking through the wall as shown in (5B) of FIG. Note that, as described above, the above-described development determination notification timing is the timing at which the player operates the effect button 37 within a predetermined button operation effective period, or the effect button 37 by the player within the operation effective period. If the operation is not performed, it is said that the operation valid period has expired, but it may be a predetermined timing instead of a timing according to such a button operation.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the reach of different production scales is obtained by making the part used by the whole part from the first to the last part different from the part from the first part to the middle part even though it is the same development determination effect. It can be used for both productions (full special production with a production scale of 80 seconds and short special production with a production scale of 30 seconds). Therefore, the amount of data that needs to be stored in the ROM 502 as effect material can be reduced. In addition, since both the short special effect and the full special effect are started from the beginning of the development determination effect, which effect is being executed at the time when these effects are started (that is, the effect is to the end) I do not know whether it is a full special production that continues or a short special production where the production ends in the middle). Also, the full special effect is used as the fourth SPSP reach effect, and the short special effect is used as the SP reach effect. Therefore, when the full special effect is executed, the big hit is greater than when the short special effect is executed. High reliability. For this reason, at the development determination notification timing, it is possible to give the player a sense of elevation by expecting the player that the full special effect is being executed (that is, the effect continues).

  In the above, the same development determination effect is used in the first to last part and the part from the beginning to the middle as the part to be used. In other words, the same development determination effect is the first part. It can be said that the pattern is divided into a pattern using both the first half and the second half (full special effect) and a pattern using only the first half (short special effect). However, the method of dividing the same development judgment effect is not limited to the method of dividing into the first half part and the second half part as described above. For example, the first part (introduction), the middle part (middle), the last part It may be divided into three parts (end). In this case, when the beginning part (introduction) is made common as the start part of the development determination effect, a pattern in which “introduction, middle, end” is used, a pattern in which “introduction, middle” is used, and “introduction” In the case where the middle part (medium) is common as the start part of the development determination effect, patterns in which “medium, end” and “medium” are used are conceivable. In this way, as a pattern in which the start part of the development determination effect is shared, the development determination effect is divided into two parts of the first half part and the second half part ("first half, second half", "first half" two patterns), More patterns can be produced. In addition, because it has a middle part (medium) by dividing the same development judgment effect into three, it is executed not only in the pattern in which only “Introduction” is executed, but also in “medium” as an example of production that does not develop until “end” Can be executed, and the player can be expected in multiple stages whether or not to evolve.

[Pseudo rendition outline]
Next, with reference to FIG. 71 and FIG. 72, an outline of the pseudo-continuous effect will be described. Note that the pseudo-continuous effect is realized mainly by timer interruption processing by the image sound control unit 500 shown in FIG.

  First, with reference to FIG. 71, the number of re-variable display (pseudo continuous number) in the pseudo continuous effect will be described. For example, as described above with reference to FIG. 19, the pseudo-continuous effect is executed as a variation pattern, a variation pattern having a variation time of about 15 seconds (per pseudo / per miss), and a variation time of about 40 seconds ( This is a time when a fluctuation pattern of pseudo 90 per second (losing) and a fluctuation time of about 90 seconds (per pseudo 3 / losing) are determined. Then, as described above with reference to FIG. 39, even if such a variation pattern is determined, a pseudo-continuous effect with a number of pseudo-continuations different from the number of pseudo-continuations designated by the variation pattern according to the sub lottery table is executed. obtain.

  As shown in (1) of FIG. 71, when the variation pattern of pseudo 1 / losing is determined, the effect control unit 400 performs the sub lottery table 1 (see (1) of FIG. 39) as described above. As shown in (A1) of FIG. 71, for example, as shown in (A1) of FIG. 71, for example, a pseudo-continuous effect is executed once for the number of times of pseudo-continuation in which the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops once after 5 seconds from the start of the fluctuation. In some cases, as shown in (A2) of FIG. 71, for example, a pseudo-continuous effect of two times of pseudo-continuous times in which the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stops twice after 10 seconds from the start of fluctuation is executed. Sometimes. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern of this pseudo per 1 / losing is determined, since the fluctuation time is as short as about 15 seconds, even if any of the pseudo-continuous effects are executed, the winning result is obtained after the reach eye is established. Is notified and the pseudo-continuous production ends. In addition, when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed once as shown in (A1), the timing when the reach is established is the timing when the second pseudo-continuous design shown in (A2) is temporarily stopped. It is preferable to overlap. By doing so, the player is not sure whether the reach is established (that is, whether the pseudo-continuous production is finished) or whether the pseudo-continuous design is temporarily stopped again (that is, whether the pseudo-continuous production is continued). A feeling of uplifting can be given.

  As shown in (2) of FIG. 71, when the variation pattern of pseudo 2 hits / losing is determined, the effect control unit 400 performs the sub lottery table 2 (see (2) of FIG. 39) as described above. As shown in (B1) of FIG. 71, for example, the pseudo-continuous effect is executed once for the number of times of pseudo-continuous in which the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stops once after 10 seconds from the start of the fluctuation. In some cases, as shown in (B2) of FIG. 71, for example, a pseudo-continuous effect is executed twice for the number of times of pseudo-continuous that the pseudo-continuous symbols temporarily stop twice after 10 seconds and 15 seconds from the start of the fluctuation. In some cases, as shown in (B3) of FIG. 71, for example, a pseudo-continuous effect of three times of pseudo-continuous times in which the pseudo-continuous symbols temporarily stop three times after 10 seconds, 15 seconds, and 20 seconds from the start of fluctuation. Sometimes executed. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern of the pseudo 2 per / losing is determined, since the fluctuation time is about 40 seconds, any reach performance is executed, and then the reach is established. It develops into subsequent development. In addition, when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed once as shown in (B1), the timing when the reach is established is the timing when the second pseudo-continuous design shown in (B3) is temporarily stopped. It is preferable to overlap. By doing so, the player is not sure whether the reach is established (that is, whether the pseudo-continuous production is finished) or whether the pseudo-continuous design is temporarily stopped again (that is, whether the pseudo-continuous production is continued). A feeling of uplifting can be given.

  As shown in (3) of FIG. 71, when the variation pattern of pseudo 3 / losing is determined, the effect control unit 400 performs the sub lottery table 3 (see (3) of FIG. 39) as described above. As shown in (C2) of FIG. 71, for example, as shown in (C2) of FIG. If the effect is executed, as shown in (C3) of FIG. 71, for example, the pseudo-continuous number of times that the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stops three times after 10 seconds, 20 seconds, and 30 seconds from the start of the fluctuation. May be executed. In addition, when the variation pattern of the pseudo 3 per / losing is determined, since the variation time is about 90 seconds, any reach performance is executed, and then the reach is established. It develops into subsequent development. In addition, when the pseudo continuous effect is executed three times as shown in (C3), the timing at which the second pseudo continuous design temporarily stops is the second pseudo continuous design shown in (B2). Preferably overlaps with the timing of temporary stop. By doing in this way, whether or not the 40-second fluctuating effect in which the reach is established is executed (that is, the pseudo-continuous effect ends), or the 90-second fluctuating effect in which the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stops again. Since it is not known whether it is being executed (that is, whether the pseudo-continuous performance will continue), it is possible to give the player a sense of exaltation.

  Note that the above-described temporary stop timing and reach timing of the pseudo-continuous symbols are merely examples, and the pseudo-continuous symbols are stopped if different numbers of pseudo-continuous effects can be executed for the same variation pattern. The timing at which the timing or reach is established is not limited to this.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 72, an outline of the pseudo-continuous effect will be described. When the pseudo continuous effect is executed, when the variation of the special symbol is started, the variation display of the decorative symbol DI is started on the image display unit 6 as shown in (1) of FIG. As shown in (2), the pseudo-continuous symbol (for example, “7”) is temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing (for example, when 10 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation). Then, as shown in (3) of FIG. 72, the variation display of the decorative symbol DI is resumed, and again at a predetermined timing (for example, when 20 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variation) as shown in (2) of FIG. ) The pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped again, or a reach (for example, “4”) is established as shown in FIG. 72 (4). Note that the effects shown in (2) and (3) of FIG. 72 are repeated according to the set number of pseudo-continuations. Then, when the reach is established, if a fluctuation pattern of pseudo per 1 / losing with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds has been selected, as shown in (5A) of FIG. For example, when the losing eye is stopped, the pseudo-continuous production ends, and when the variation pattern of pseudo 2 per / losing with a variation time of 40 seconds is selected, or when the variation pattern of pseudo 3 per / losing with a variation time of 90 seconds is selected. When the pattern has been selected, as shown in (5B) of FIG. In the above description, the example in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed (pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed) has been described, but in addition to this, the decorative symbol (center symbol) to be temporarily stopped and displayed is the pseudo-continuous effect. It is also possible to perform an effect (so-called quasi-continuous gaze effect) in which a loss is notified without being temporarily stopped and displayed in a pseudo-continuous pattern, in spite of being temporarily stopped and displayed with a symbol.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 400 determines the effect content with reference to the sub-lottery tables 1, 2, and 3 (see FIG. 39) even for one variation pattern related to the pseudo-continuous effect. As a result, it is possible to perform a plurality of pseudo-continuous productions, and various productions can be realized. Specifically, even if a variation pattern with one pseudo-continuous number is determined, a pseudo-continuous effect with one or two pseudo-continuous times can be executed, and a variation pattern with two pseudo-continuous times is determined. However, any number of pseudo-continuous effects can be executed with 1 to 3 pseudo-continuous times, and even if a variation pattern with three pseudo-continuous times is determined, the pseudo-continuous effect with two or three pseudo-continuous effects is determined. Can be executed. Further, as described above, when the period during which the pseudo-continuous effect of a specific pseudo-continuous number (for example, pseudo-3) is not executed becomes long, the pseudo-continuous effect of the pseudo-continuous number of times can be easily executed. It is possible to suppress a deviation in the execution frequency of the continuation number of pseudo-continuous effects.

[Outline of the special effects after the emergency]
Next, with reference to FIG. 73 and FIG. 74, an outline of the post-impact dedicated effect (and post-impact variation effect) will be described. Note that the post-impact dedicated effect is realized mainly by timer interrupt processing by the image sound control unit 500 shown in FIGS. 48, 51, and 57. Further, as described above, the post-impact dedicated effect is a drama effect that is selected from the replacement update effects and has a total length of 60 seconds (more specifically, a version of a category A play effect that is lost).

  First, referring to (1) of FIG. 73, the special symbol lottery suspension is not interrupted in the short-time game state (see FIG. 6) of 30 times after the sudden big hit (big hit C) (that is, waiting for customers) An explanation will be given of the post-crash dedicated effect when all the special symbol lottery results are lost. In the short-time gaming state after this big hit, as described above with reference to FIG. 23, when the number of revolutions in the short-time gaming state is “1”, the special symbol variation time in the case of “losing” Is “9.5 seconds”, and the fixed time is “0.5 seconds”. Therefore, the total time for the stop symbol to be fixed and stopped after the special symbol is variably displayed in the special symbol lottery for the first rotation is “ 10.0 seconds ". On the other hand, when the number of revolutions in the short-time gaming state is “2-30 times”, the variation time of the special symbol in the case of “losing” is “1.5 seconds” and the fixed time is “0.5 seconds”. Therefore, the total time that the stop symbol is fixedly stopped after the special symbol is variably displayed in one special symbol lottery is “2.0 seconds”. Therefore, the special symbol lottery hold is not interrupted, and when the special symbol is variably displayed 30 times and the fixed time elapses (10.0 seconds + 2.0 seconds × 29 times =), “68 seconds” elapses. On the other hand, the post-rush special effect (theatrical production) is not linked to the special symbol variation display, and the first special symbol variation display is selected after the first special symbol variation display is started. Since the production starts with the elapse of the specified time (8.0 seconds; selection time) and has a total length of 60 seconds, the display of the variation of the 30th special symbol ends, and the time ends when the fixed time elapses. In other words, the post-impact dedicated effect ends exactly in the 30-time short game state, and thus the post-impact dedicated effect can function as a dedicated effect in the short-time game state period after the sudden hit. it can. In this way, in order to match the execution time of the special effect after the impact with the sum of the variation time of the special symbol 30 times and the fixed time in this way, the special effect after the impact is a so-called “no special symbol change”. It progresses (executes) even in the fixed time. Also, the variation time of the special symbol for the first rotation is 9.5 seconds, but the variation time during which the special effect is executed after the crash is 1.5 seconds excluding the first 8.0 seconds. In the case of losing in the short time gaming state of 30 times, the special effect after the crash is only 2.0 seconds (= variation time 1.5 seconds + confirmation time 0.5 seconds) at any speed. Will progress.

  Next, referring to (2) of FIG. 73, the special symbol lottery suspension may be interrupted (that is, the customer) may be interrupted in the 30 time-saving gaming state (see FIG. 6) after the big hit (big hit C). A description will be given of the post-impact dedicated effect when the result of all the special symbol lotteries is lost. In this case, when the special symbol lottery suspension is interrupted (that is, when the customer wait state is entered), the progress of the dedicated effect after the crash is temporarily stopped. Specifically, as shown in (2) of FIG. 73, for example, when the special symbol variation display is executed twice, when the customer enters a waiting state, the progress of the special effect after the collision is “twice”. X “2.0 seconds” = pauses in a state of progressing by “4.0 seconds”. After that, when the special symbol variation display is resumed, the progress of the special effect after the collision is resumed from the state where the special symbol is paused again (that is, the progression is resumed from the state where it has proceeded for 4.0 seconds). As described above, in this embodiment, when the special symbol lottery suspension is interrupted and the special symbol lottery with a total length of 60 seconds is suspended, when the special symbol variation display is resumed, Resume progress of production. For this reason, every time when the special symbol change display is executed and the fixed time elapses, an effect of 2 seconds is advanced. Even if the special symbol lottery is suspended, the 30th special symbol The change display ends when the fixed display time elapses.

  Next, with reference to (3) and (4) of FIG. 73, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit in 30 time-saving gaming states (see FIG. 6) after the big hit (hit C) Described below is the dedicated post-impact production. 73 (3) shows a case where a big hit is made with a small number of rotations (for example, the second rotation) in the short-time gaming state, and FIG. 73 (4) shows a large number of rotations (for example, the 26th rotation) in the short-time gaming state. ) Shows the case of big hit.

  As shown in (3) of FIG. 73, in the case of a big hit in the second rotation ("2-6 times") in the short-time gaming state, as described above with reference to FIG. Since it is “60 seconds” (per 1st scale) and the fixed time is “0.5 seconds”, the total time that the stopped symbol is fixed and stopped after the special symbol is variably displayed in one special symbol lottery is “60.5 seconds”. For this reason, when the variation display of the special symbol for the second rotation in the short-time gaming state is finished and the fixed time has elapsed, the variation display of the first special symbol is started and the selection time elapses until “2.0 seconds. ”+“ 60.5 seconds ”=“ 62.5 seconds ”. On the other hand, the post-impact dedicated effect is not linked with the special symbol variation display, and starts when the first special symbol variation display starts and the selection time elapses. Therefore, it is possible to advance the production until the final time has elapsed since the end of the display of the variation of the special symbol in the second rotation. In this case, with respect to the special effect after the “60 seconds” collision, “62” is displayed after the selection time elapses until the fixed time elapses after the special symbol change display for the second rotation ends. .5 seconds ", but immediately before the end of the special effect after the collision (for example, from 1 second before), the big hit notification effect is executed instead of the post-impact dedicated effect. 1 second + remaining 2.5 seconds), the remaining production time is consumed. For example, when the number of revolutions is “2 to 6 times”, the same variation pattern (variation time 60 seconds) is used. However, when a big hit is made at the sixth rotation, the variation display of the special symbol at the first rotation is performed. “5 times” × “2.0 seconds” + “60.5 seconds” after the selection time has elapsed and the fixed symbol's change display for the 6th rotation is finished and the fixed time has elapsed. = 70.5 seconds have passed. In this case, the remaining effect time is consumed by continuing the jackpot notification effect (replacement 1 second + remaining 10.5 seconds). In this way, in the range of the rotational speeds assigned to the same variation pattern shown in FIG. 23, the remaining presentation time is consumed by increasing the execution time of the jackpot notification effect as the rotational speed increases.

  Similarly, as shown in (4) of FIG. 73, when the big hit is the 26th rotation (“25 to 30 times”) in the short-time gaming state, as described above with reference to FIG. Since the variation time is “12 seconds” (per 5th scale) and the confirmation time is “0.5 seconds”, the stop symbol is confirmed and stopped after the special symbol is variably displayed in one special symbol lottery. Is 12.5 seconds. For this reason, when the variation display of the 26th special symbol in the short-time gaming state is finished and the fixed time has elapsed, the variation display of the first special symbol is started and the selection time has elapsed, and then "25 times" X “2.0 seconds” + “12.5 seconds” = “62.5 seconds” elapses. On the other hand, the post-impact dedicated effect is not linked with the special symbol variation display, and starts when the first special symbol variation display starts and the selection time elapses. Therefore, it is possible to advance the effect until the final time until the fixed time elapses after the display of the variation of the special symbol at the 26th rotation is completed. As described with reference to (3) of FIG. 73, in this case as well, the jackpot notification is given immediately before the end of the post-impact dedicated effect (for example, from one second before) after the emergency switch. The effect is executed, and the jackpot notification effect is continued (replacement 1 second + remaining 2.5 seconds), whereby the remaining effect time is consumed. Similarly, in the range of the number of rotations assigned to the same fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 23, the remaining effect time is consumed by increasing the execution time of the jackpot notification effect as the number of rotations increases. .

  As can be seen from (3) and (4) of FIG. 73, when the special symbol lottery result is a big hit in 30 short-time game states after the big hit (hit C), the big hit As the number of rotations increases, the fluctuation time becomes shorter. Further, each variation pattern (variation time) shown in FIG. 23 is from the start of the variation display of the first rotation to the end of the selection time and the end of the variation display of the big number of rotations and the passage of the fixed time. The configuration is such that 60 seconds elapse (see FIG. 23). For this reason, it is possible to secure a time for executing a dedicated effect after a 60-second collision, regardless of the number of rotations in the short-time game state after the collision big hit, and the adjustment jackpot notification effect is also provided. It is sufficient to execute the maximum (replacement 1 second + remaining 10.5 seconds), and a natural effect can be realized.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 74, an outline of the post-rush dedicated effect will be described. When the special effect after the collision is executed, first, as shown in (1) of FIG. 74, in the first rotation in the short-time gaming state after the big hit, as a special effect after the collision, the total length is 60 seconds. A selection screen for selecting one of the replacement update effects (for example, when the phase of category A is 7 is “A-3” to “A-7”) is displayed for a specified time (8.0 seconds). Then, the player selects a replacement update effect to be executed as a dedicated effect after the emergency at a specified time (selection time; 8.0 seconds) when the selection screen is displayed. Then, the post-impact dedicated effect selected by the player (or a predetermined post-impact dedicated effect if not selected by the player) is started as the specified selection time elapses. Therefore, as shown in (2) of FIG. 74, at the time when the second rotation in the short-time game state after the big hit is started, the post-impact dedicated effect is the change time (9. (2 seconds) The production is in progress for 2 seconds, which is the sum of the change time (1.5 seconds) excluding the selection time (8.0 seconds) and the fixed time (0.5 seconds) (that is, the remaining production) Time is 58 seconds). Then, for example, when the waiting state is reached when the change display of the second rotation is finished and the fixed time has elapsed, as shown in (3) of FIG. 74, the progress of the dedicated effect after the collision is temporarily stopped (that is, , Pause when the remaining time of production is 56 seconds). Thereafter, when the special symbol variation display is resumed, as shown in (4) of FIG. 74, the progress of the dedicated production after the collision is resumed (that is, the remaining production time is resumed from 56 seconds). ) If the game is not a big hit in the short game state with 30 rotations, as shown in (5A) of FIG. 74, the loss notification effect (the effect of the theater effect is “x”) in the change display of the special symbol of 30 rotations. The effect to be determined is executed and the variation display ends, and the fixed time elapses, and the dedicated effect ends after the collision (that is, the remaining time of the effect is 0 second). On the other hand, for example, in the case of a big hit at the 26th rotation, as shown in (5B) of FIG. 74, the special effect after the collision proceeds even in the fluctuation, and thereafter, as shown in (6) of FIG. The jackpot notification effect (the effect of determining that the theater effect is “◯”) is executed. In this way, in this embodiment, the determination effect (effect for notifying whether it is a big hit or a loss) is performed using the fluctuation display at the 30th rotation to determine that the effect of the theater effect is “◯” or “×”. However, regardless of which judgment effect is made, the theater effect having the same content continues to be reproduced as the dedicated effect after the emergency. Also, during the big hit variation display shown in (5B) of FIG. 74, the decorative symbol DI displayed in a reduced size in the upper left corner of the image display unit 6 is pseudo-stopped every 2.0 seconds as a post-collision variation effect. It is possible to make it appear as if the change is not a big hit change (ie, not a change time of 12 seconds, for example). It becomes.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the post-impact dedicated effect is continuously executed even during a fixed time in which the special symbol is displayed after being variably displayed. For this reason, if the special symbol lottery suspension is not interrupted, the special effect after the crash is continued without interruption even during the fixed time between the variation time of the special symbol and the variation time of the next special symbol. It becomes possible. On the other hand, when the special symbol lottery is suspended, the post-impact dedicated production is paused, and when the special symbol variable display is resumed, the production is resumed. . For this reason, the post-impact dedicated effect will progress every time the special symbol is changed, and there will be no case where a part of the effect is lost and is not executed. For this reason, it is possible to use a story effect or the like that is not suitable if it is interrupted as a dedicated effect after an emergency.

[Outline of the selection effect in the probabilistic gaming state]
Next, with reference to FIG. 73 and FIG. 74, an outline of the selection effect in the probability variation gaming state will be described. This selection effect is realized mainly by timer interruption processing by the image sound control unit 500 shown in FIGS. 47, 48, 51, and 58. Further, when the selection effect is executed during the round in the big hit game, since the selection effect that was executed at this time is set in the RAM 503, this selection effect is used as the selection effect in the probability variation game state. It is carried over and executed.

  First, with reference to (1) of FIG. 75, the selection effect when the special symbol lottery hold is not interrupted in the probability variation gaming state (that is, the customer waiting state is not entered) will be described. In this probability variation gaming state, as described above with reference to FIG. 24, the variation time of the special symbol in the case of “losing” is “0.5 seconds”, and the variation time of the special symbol in the case of “winning” Is “4.5 seconds”, and each confirmed time is “0.5 seconds”, so the total time that the stopped symbol is fixed and stopped after the special symbol is variably displayed in one special symbol lottery is lost. The case is “1.0 second” and the case is “5.0 second”. For this reason, when the special symbol lottery is not suspended, the special symbol lottery is digested at high speed. On the other hand, the selection effect is continuously executed during the time when the special symbol is variably displayed and the time when the special symbol is stopped without being linked with the variation display of the special symbol. Specifically, the selected effect is an effect selected from the additional update effects, and each of the additional update effects has a certain effect scale (60 seconds). The next additional update effect is automatically selected and executed according to the selection mode (for example, the intra-category sequential selection mode). For this reason, the selection effect is continuously executed, and is terminated when the big hit effect is started, for example, when the big hit is made at the 60th rotation. When the big hit is the big hit D, the selection effect is executed as the normal round effect during the big hit, so the selection effect that has been executed at this time is continuously executed.

  By the way, the special symbol lottery is digested at a high speed as described above. In the probability variation gaming state, since it is controlled in a short time (electric support) state until the next time, it is substantially the next big hit. Therefore, the game is based on a selection effect that is executed without being linked to the fluctuation effect without focusing on the notification effect (fluctuation effect) for notifying whether it is a big hit or not. The main focus is to entertain people. This selection effect can be executed from among the additional update effects. Since the additional update effect includes a replacement update effect (see FIG. 32), it is also possible to execute the replacement update effect as the selection effect. However, when the replacement update effect is executed as the selected effect, unlike the case where the replacement update effect is executed as the dedicated effect after the emergency (see FIG. 74), the theater effect is set to “○” or “×”. The determination effect (effect for notifying whether it is a big hit or a loss; see (5A) or (6) in FIG. 74) is not executed.

  Next, with reference to (2) of FIG. 75, a description will be given of a selection effect when the special symbol lottery suspension is interrupted (that is, a customer waiting state) in the probability variation gaming state. In this case, the selection effect is continuously executed even in the customer waiting state. However, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after entering the customer waiting state, the volume level of the effect sound of the selection effect is changed (for example, decreased). When the special symbol variation display is resumed, the volume level is returned to the original volume level again, and the selection effect is executed. In other words, the selection effect is continuously executed after 30 seconds have elapsed from the time when the customer waits until the next special symbol change display is started, but the volume level is changed. Become.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 76, an outline of the selection effect in the probability variation gaming state will be described. When this selection effect is executed, as shown in (1) of FIG. 74, in the probability variation gaming state, one of the theater effects (for example, “A- 4 ") is executed, and at this time, the decorative symbol DI is reduced and displayed in the upper left corner of the image display unit 6 as a variation effect during probability variation. When this selection effect is executed, as shown in (2) of FIG. 74, the player operates the effect key 38 and the like as in the case of the selection effect during the big hit, so that the image display unit 6 It is possible to display an effect selection screen on the right side of, to switch the category of the selected effect, or to display the name of the additional update effect displayed in the cursor. When the variation display of the special symbol is finished, the decorative symbol DI that has been variably displayed in the upper left corner of the image display unit 6 is stopped and displayed. Thereafter, when there is no special symbol lottery pending (that is, waiting for a customer) In this state, as shown in (3) of FIG. 74, the decorative design DI remains stopped and displayed, but the selection effect is continued even when the customer wait state is entered. Then, as shown in (4) of FIG. 74, when 30 seconds have elapsed since entering the customer waiting state, the volume level of the selected effect is changed from the volume level (eg, level 7) that has been executed so far, for example. Volume level is reduced to 1. Then, as shown in (5) of FIG. 74, when the variation display of the special symbol is resumed, the volume level is returned to the original volume level (level 7) again and the selection effect is executed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the probability variation gaming state, the selection effect that is not linked to the fluctuation of the special symbol (that is, not linked to the determination of the big hit / losing) is executed. The selected effect can be watched. Further, in this embodiment, when the 60-second theater effect ends, the next theater effect is automatically started according to the selection mode, so that the selection effect is continuously executed. Even when the time when the jackpot is not long (so-called “hit”), it is possible to reduce the feeling of discouragement caused by not hitting the jackpot by making the player enjoy the selection effect. Note that the selection effect is not limited to one in which a 60-second theater effect is continuously executed as described above, and a longer effect (for example, 5 minutes) may be executed. In this case, for example, as the special symbol lottery is lost, the selection effect is executed for a longer time. Therefore, for the player, the selection effect is longer than the interest of whether or not it is a big hit. It is possible to arouse an interest in wanting to see (for example, wanting to see the production until the end in the probability variation gaming state). In addition, since this selection effect is continuously executed even in the customer waiting state, for example, a player who wants to change his / her mood by not hitting the player more, stops the launch of the game ball and selects in the customer waiting state. You can also enjoy the production. On the other hand, the volume of the selected effect is changed (for example, decreased) when a predetermined time (30 seconds in the present embodiment) elapses from the waiting state, for example, when the player leaves the seat in the probability variation gaming state. ) For this reason, it is possible to prevent an ineffective performance from being performed even when there is no player, and the selection effect is continued as a performance image so that the current gaming state of the gaming machine is a special gaming state. It is also possible to notify (that is, the probability variation gaming state). Further, this selection effect can be executed from among the additional update effects, and the additional update effect includes a replacement update effect (see FIG. 32), so that the replacement update effect can also be executed as the selection effect. As described above, since the replacement update effect is also used as a reach effect (a partial theater reach effect or a selected theater reach effect), it is possible to execute a reach effect as a selected effect. By the way, whether or not partial drama reach production or selective drama reach production is executed as a reach production is determined based on a lottery, and therefore, there may be cases where partial drama reach production and selective drama reach production do not appear. is there. However, since these reach effects can be executed as selection effects in this way, the player can select and enjoy effects that could not be viewed as reach effects. In the above-described embodiment, the selection effect that is not interlocked with the variation of the special symbol is executed in the probability variation gaming state. However, the selection effect may be performed not in the probability variation gaming state but in the time-saving gaming state, for example. . Even in this case, in a gaming machine with a large number of time reductions, there is a case where it is not possible to make a big hit, so the same effect as described above can be achieved.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, according to the time indicated by the RTC 404, a replacement update effect and an addition from among the theater effects stored in the ROM 502 by two different update methods of replacement update and additional update. An update effect is specified. That is, in the replacement update effect, only five theater effects are specified in the order of the latest update, while in the additional update effect, all the theater effects updated so far are specified. That is, while only five theater effects are specified as replacement effects even after time passes, the number of theater effects specified as additional update effects increases as time passes. Since the replacement update effect and the additional update effect are used differently as game effects, various effects can be realized. Specifically, the replacement update effect is used as a post-emergency dedicated effect and reach effect (selected theater reach effect, partial theater reach effect), while the additional update effect is selected during the big hit round and the probable game state Used as production. In other words, the replacement update effect is used only when a special effect or a reach effect after an emergency is executed by the effect lottery, while the additional update effect is used by the player regardless of the effect lottery. When you can choose freely. Therefore, even if the theater effect specified as the replacement update effect is not executed, the replacement update effect is included in the theater effect specified as the additional update effect in the probable game state during or after the big hit by hitting the jackpot Therefore, the player can see the theater performance that was not performed. On the other hand, as the replacement update effect, only the five most recently updated theater effects are specified, and therefore, for example, an old theater effect is not executed as a reach effect. Since this replacement update effect is updated to a new one over time, the latest theater effect is always executed as the reach effect. For this reason, it becomes possible to attract a player's interest continuously and to enhance the interest of the game.

[Modification]
In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 33, the second RTC effect is not executed in a specific gaming state (that is, the short-time gaming state, the probability variation gaming state, and the big hit gaming state). However, the condition that the second RTC effect is not executed may not be determined depending on the gaming state. For example, the second RTC effect may not be executed when an effect in a predetermined effect mode is being executed in the image display unit 6 even in the same normal gaming state. Further, as shown in FIG. 33, the second RTC effect is not executed in a specific gaming state, but it is not completely executed, and its execution may be restricted. In addition, when execution is restricted, the execution should be relatively restricted as compared with other effects. For example, when other effects are displayed on the full screen in the image display unit 6. It may be executed in a display unit (sub display unit) smaller than the image display unit 6 or may be output with a production sound smaller than the production sound of other productions.

  In the above-described embodiment, for example, when the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect is being executed, the simultaneous game effect is displayed in a translucent manner, so that the visibility of the highly reliable SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect is improved. Assured. However, as a method of ensuring the visibility of the SP reach effect or SPSP reach effect that is already being executed, the method of displaying the simultaneous game effect in a translucent manner is not limited. Specifically, the simultaneous game effect may be displayed in a manner lower than the visibility of the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect that is already being executed, and may be displayed intermittently at predetermined intervals, for example. However, it may be displayed in a display area (sub-screen) smaller than the image display unit 6.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pseudo control effect is described as an example in which the effect control unit 400 determines the effect content with reference to the sub lottery table regardless of the variation pattern determined by the main control unit 100. . However, the example in which the production control unit 400 determines the production content with reference to the sub-lottery table in this way is not limited to the pseudo-continuous production, but other specific production (for example, a highly reliable specific reach production). There may be. Specifically, for example, even if the variation pattern determined by the main control unit 100 is not the type of the production pattern that executes the specific reach production, the production control unit 400 refers to the sub lottery table and this specific reach. The production may be executable. Note that as the sub lottery table at this time, a table in which the specific reach effect is more likely to be executed as the number of fluctuations in which the specific reach effect is not continuously executed increases. In addition, the table referred to is not changed according to the number of fluctuations in which the specific reach effect is not continuously executed as described above, and the table referred to may be changed according to the number of fluctuations after the big hit, for example. . In this case, for example, the specific reach effect may be more easily executed as the number of fluctuations after the big hit is smaller. In this way, a specific reach effect with high reliability is likely to be executed after the big hit, so that it is easy to raise the player's expectation that it may be a big hit again (so-called continuous change).

  In the above-described embodiment, the selection effect is temporarily stopped when the V round effect is executed. However, the execution of the selection effect during the big hit is limited as described above. Is not limited to when is executed. For example, in a gaming machine that can execute a promotion effect (for example, an effect that informs that it is a big hit of 16R by showing it as a big hit of 8R) during a round of a big hit game, The selection effect may be paused. In the present embodiment, the effect that is paused when the V-round effect is executed is the selection effect selected by the player. However, the effect is not limited to this, but a predetermined effect. There may be.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the theater effect used as the reach effect (selected theater reach effect, partial theater reach effect) is determined from the replacement update effect, but is determined from the additional update effect. It may be a thing. In addition, when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when it is a specific variation pattern or a specific performance mode), it can be selected as a reach effect from all the theater effects stored in the ROM 502. It is good. In addition, although the theater effect only for category A is set as the replacement update effect, the theater effects of a plurality of categories including other categories may be set.

  In the above-described embodiment, the first big prize opening 23 is controlled to open and close in rounds other than the V round, and the second big prize opening 51 including the V region 53 is controlled to open and close in the V round. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a single attacker having only the second big winning opening 51 may be used. In this case, the second prize winning opening is controlled to open / close in rounds other than the V round, but the V area 53 is not opened, and the V area 53 is opened only in the V round. You can get it.

  In the above-described embodiment, the production control unit 400 determines the production pattern according to the notification production start command, sets the production content by determining the contents of various notice productions based on the production pattern, A command for instructing the content of the effect is transmitted to the image sound control unit 500, and the image sound control unit 500 executes the effect by setting an execution schedule such as execution timing and execution time of various effects according to the command. It was. However, the processing sharing between the effect control unit 400 and the image sound control unit 500 is not limited to this. For example, the effect control unit 400 determines only the effect pattern according to the notification effect start command, and performs image sound control. The unit 500 may determine various notice effects based on the effect pattern transmitted from the effect control unit 400, and may further determine the execution schedule and execute the effects. Further, when a single CPU is used as a CPU for performing display control, all the above-described processes may be performed by the same CPU.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, when a special symbol lottery is won (big hit), a predetermined percentage (for example, as shown in FIG. An example is a game configuration (a so-called loop machine) that is set to a probable game state until the next big hit (exactly until 999 times the variation display of special symbols is reached) on the condition of winning V. Explained. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a special symbol lottery is won (big hit), a special symbol variation display is performed at a predetermined number of rotations (for example, 150 times) at a rate of 100% on the condition of winning V. It may be a game configuration (so-called ST machine) that is set to the probability variation gaming state until it is executed.

  In the embodiment described above, the present invention has been described by taking a pachinko gaming machine as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and may be applied to, for example, a slot machine (cylinder type gaming machine, pachislot machine) within an applicable range. In this case, game information (random number; determination information) for determining a win is acquired by turning on the lever with a medal inserted in the slot machine (that is, the game information is acquired). The condition to be fulfilled). In this case, the “notification effect” in each of the embodiments described above corresponds to the effect from when the reel is changed to when it is stopped by turning on the lever in the slot machine.

  Moreover, although the features of the present embodiment and the features of the modified examples have been described above, it goes without saying that these features may be appropriately combined.

  Further, the shape, number, installation position, and the like of each component provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above are merely examples, and the scope of the present invention is not limited to other shapes, numbers, and installation positions. It goes without saying that the present invention can be realized without departing from the above. Further, it goes without saying that the numerical values and the like used in the above-described processing are merely examples, and the present invention can be realized even with other numerical values.

  As mentioned above, although this invention was demonstrated in detail using embodiment, the above-mentioned description is only the illustration of this invention in all the points, and does not intend to limit the range. It goes without saying that various improvements and modifications can be made without departing from the scope of the present invention. In addition, it is to be understood that the terms used in the present specification are used in the meaning normally used in the art unless otherwise specified. Thus, unless defined otherwise, all technical and technical terms used herein have the same meaning as commonly understood by one of ordinary skill in the art to which this invention belongs. In case of conflict, the present specification, including definitions, will control.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Game machine 2 ... Game board 4 ... Display 5 ... Frame member 6 ... Image display part 7 ... Movable accessory 8 ... Board lamp 20 ... Game area 21 ... 1st start port 22 ... 2nd start port 23 ... 1st Grand prize opening 24 ... Normal prize opening 25 ... Gate 26 ... Discharge port 27 ... Electric tulip 31 ... Handle 32 ... Lever 33 ... Stop button 34 ... Eject button 35 ... Speaker 36 ... Frame lamp 37 ... Production button 38 ... Production key 39 ... Plate 43 ... Locking part 50 ... Right honey 51 ... Second big prize opening 52 ... V honey 53 ... V area 6w ... Wipe area 100 ... Main control part 101, 201, 301, 401, 501, 601 ... CPU
102, 202, 302, 402, 502, 602 ... ROM
103, 203, 303, 403, 503, 603 ... RAM
111a ... 1st start opening switch 111b ... 2nd start opening switch 112 ... Electric tulip opening / closing part 113 ... Gate switch 114 ... 1st big winning opening switch 115 ... 1st big winning opening opening / closing part 116 ... Normal winning opening switch 117 ... No. 2 big prize opening switch 118 ... 2nd big prize opening and closing section 119 ... V area switch 120 ... V area opening and closing section 200 ... launch control section 211 ... launching device 300 ... payout control section 311 ... payout drive section 400 ... effect control section 404 ... RTC
500 ... Image sound control unit 600 ... Lamp control unit 700 ... Power supply DI ... Decorative pattern

Claims (2)

Effect control means for executing one of a plurality of game effects according to the game state;
Operation means that can be operated by the player;
Operation determining means for determining whether or not a predetermined operation has been performed on the operating means;
Effect state changing means for changing the effect state of the current game effect being executed by the effect control means,
The production state changing means is
When the operation determining means determines that the predetermined operation has been performed, the effect state is changed depending on which of the plurality of game effects is the current game effect being executed by the effect control means. A gaming machine. The specific image is an image including a plurality of selectable items,
The specific image display means includes
A specific image appearance unit that displays the specific image when the specific image is not displayed when the operation determination unit determines that the predetermined operation has been performed;
An item selection unit that selects one of the plurality of items in the specific image when the specific image is displayed when the operation determination unit determines that the predetermined operation has been performed. The gaming machine according to 1.

Images